JP2021006233A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To effectively provide information display means for displaying information in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a transparent member provided in a front face side of a game board on which a game area is formed, acquisition means for acquiring game information in response to an entry of a game ball into a predetermined start port provided in the game board, determination means for determining whether a special game advantageous for a player is carried out or not on the basis of the acquired game information, light emission means for carrying out a light emission performance which expects that it is determined that the special game is carried out, decoration means provided in the vicinity of the light emission means to give decoration according to the motif of the game machine, and attention arousing means for arousing attention related to gazing at the light emission performance by the light emission means. A first distance between the transparent member and the attention arousing means, and a second distance between the transparent member and the light emission means are different.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

In a game machine, for example, in Patent Document 1, an effect operation device is provided on the right side of a ball plate, and the effect operation device is provided with an effect operation lever that can move between a storage position and an operable position. It is disclosed. Further, it is disclosed that the operation input related to the game effect is performed by tilting the effect operation lever located at the operable position.

JP-A-2018-187116

By the way, the gaming machine is provided with information display means such as a sticker in order to display information such as alerting the player or the manager. However, if the information display means is simply provided in the game machine, it cannot be expected that the information is effectively shown to the player and the manager.
An object of the present invention is to effectively provide an information display means for displaying information in a game machine.

The present invention that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has the transparent member (for example, a glass plate 119) provided on the front side of the game board on which the game area is formed, and a predetermined start port provided on the game board. It is advantageous for the player based on the acquisition means (for example, the random number acquisition unit 231) for acquiring the game information according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 121 (for example) and the acquired game information. A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) and a light emitting means for performing a light emitting effect for expecting that the special game is determined to be performed (for example, a light emitting unit 24). ), A decorative means (for example, a decorative sticker 23) provided in the vicinity of the light emitting means (for example, the light emitting unit 24) and decorating according to the motif of the gaming machine, and the light emitting means (for example, the light emitting unit 24). ) Is provided with a warning means (for example, a light warning sticker 75) for calling attention regarding staring at the light emitting effect, and the transparent member (for example, a glass plate 119) and the warning means (for example, light). The first distance, which is the distance to the caution sticker 75), is different from the second distance, which is the distance between the transparent member (for example, the glass plate 119) and the light emitting means (for example, the light emitting unit 24). It is a gaming machine characterized by.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are exemplified in the description of the present invention, and the present invention is not reduced by these reference numerals.

According to the present invention, an information display means for displaying information can be effectively provided in a game machine.

It is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. (A) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display arranged at the lower left of the game board, and (b) is a partial plan view of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the image / sound control part and the lamp control part of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the game control part of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of the basic processing by a game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of the processing at the time of power-off by a game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the start port switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the gate switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the special symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of processing during stop. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of ordinary symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the big prize opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the electric tulip processing. It is a figure which shows the composition example of the random number used in this embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the composition example of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure which shows the composition example of a jackpot symbol random number, (c ) Is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a hit random number. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. It is a block diagram explaining the structure example of the RAM of the game control part, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of a storage area, (b) is a block diagram which shows each structure of the storage part shown in (a). Is. It is a block diagram explaining the structure example of the RAM of the effect control part, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of the hold storage area, (b) is a block which shows each structure of the storage part shown in (a). It is a figure. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the preliminary determination processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of a command, (a) is a figure which shows the data structure of a command, and (b) is a figure which shows the structure as a bit string of a command. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command storage area in RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the content of output processing by an output control part. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of an effect control part, (a) is a figure which shows the main process, (b) is a figure which shows interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a command reception process. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 26. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the ending effect selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting command reception process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the effect button processing. It is explanatory drawing of the effect operation apparatus of this embodiment. It is a partial plan view of a frame member. (A) is a view showing the front side of the warning sticker, and (B) is a view showing the back side of the warning sticker. It is a figure which showed the structure of the part of the frame member to which a caution sticker is affixed, and the part in the vicinity thereof. It is a figure which showed the example which an operator attaches a caution sticker to a frame member using a jig. It is a figure which showed the positional relationship between an effect lever and a handle, and a caution sticker. It is a figure which shows the attention raising means of the modification. It is a figure which showed the displacement amount of the effect button and the displacement amount of an effect lever. It is a figure which showed the effect lever of the modification. It is a figure which showed the variation effect pattern table for a big hit in a low probability time saving no game state. It is a figure which showed the variation effect pattern table for small hit and miss in a low probability time saving no game state. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is explanatory drawing of the period in which the operation of the effect lever is effective in the variation effect example 3, and the period in which the operation of an effect button is effective in the variation effect example 4. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the effect by the operation of a player. It is a figure which showed the other adjustment example of a volume and a light amount. It is a figure which showed the setting example of an automatic operation. It is a figure which showed the setting example of the effect in the modification. It is a figure which showed the modification of the pseudo continuous production. It is a figure which showed the other modification of the pseudo continuous production. It is a figure which showed the other modification of the pseudo continuous production. It is a figure which showed the other modification of the pseudo continuous production. It is an overall view of the pachinko gaming machine of Embodiment 2. It is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the game frame of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the 1st start port unit provided with the 1st start port of Embodiment 2. It is a figure which shows the pachinko game machine with the glass door frame open. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine is seen from the rear side. It is explanatory drawing of the contact caution sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the operation caution sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the spec sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the display sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the light attention alert sticker, the fraud prevention alert sticker, and the board number sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the certificate stamp sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the frame caution sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the board caution sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the frame number sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the handling caution sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the sub ROM seal of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the main board management sticker, the main board sticker, and the main ROM sticker of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the voltage seal of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing of the modification 1 of the seal concerning the alerting. It is explanatory drawing of the modification 2 of the seal concerning the alerting. It is an overall view of the external information terminal part in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 6 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 6 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 6 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 6 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in the variation effect example 6. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 7 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 7 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 7 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 7 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in the variation effect example 7. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 8 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 8 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is explanatory drawing of the variation effect example 8 in the symbol variation effect of a decorative symbol performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in the variation effect example 8. It is explanatory drawing of the customer waiting production of this embodiment. This is a reception screen for setting the contents of the player's production in the design variation production of the pachinko gaming machine.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
<Embodiment 1>
[Basic configuration of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
The pachinko game machine 100 as an example of the game machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out a prize ball when a game ball launched by a player's instruction operation wins a prize. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a game board 110 on which a game ball is launched, and a game frame 150 surrounding the game board 110. The game board 110 is detachably attached to the game frame 150.

The game board 110 has, on the front surface, a game area 111 for playing a game with a game ball, a rail member 112 on which a game ball launched from below rises and forms a passage toward an upper position of the game area 111, and a game. A guide member 113 for guiding the game ball is provided on the right side of the region 111.
In the present embodiment, an image display unit 114 for displaying various images for effect is provided at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 is provided with a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and as the game progresses by the player, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the symbol lottery result (symbol change result) can be displayed. An effect image due to the appearance of a character or an item or an effect image using the hold display described later is displayed.
Further, on the front surface of the game board 110, a movable accessory 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided. The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110, and the board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.
Further, an upper accessory 5 used for various effects is provided on the upper portion of the game frame 150. The upper accessory 5 is provided so as to be movable upward.

In the game area 111, a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls are arranged. Further, in the game area 111, various accessories related to winning a prize or a lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. Further, the game area 111 is provided with an discharge port 117 that discharges a game ball launched into the game area 111 that has not won a prize in the winning port to the outside of the game area 111.

In the present embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and lottery, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 where the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) starts when the game ball wins, and the second starting port 122 when the game ball passes are normal. A starting gate (hereinafter, simply referred to as a gate) 124 at which a symbol lottery (opening / closing lottery) is started is arranged on the game board 110. In FIG. 1, gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, the left gate 124 is described as 124L, and the right gate 124 is described as 124R. Further, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 referred to here refer to winning openings that trigger the operation of the predetermined special symbol display 1. Specifically, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 are provided with switches (first starting port switch 211 and second starting port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passage of a game ball at the time of winning a prize. Has been done. Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the operation of the special symbol display.

The second starting port 122 includes an electric tulip (opening / closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory that opens and closes and lights up a pair of tulip flower-shaped blades by an electric solenoid. In the electric tulip 123, when the wings are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 122, while when the wings are opened, the entrance of the second starting port 122 expands and the game ball moves to the second starting port 122. It is configured to be easy to enter. Then, when the electric tulip 123 wins the ordinary symbol lottery, the blades open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a low probability state in which the winning probability is low and a high probability state in which the winning probability is higher than the low probability state, based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery. Then, it is controlled to either a low probability state or a high probability state based on a predetermined condition.
In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a gaming state in which there is less chance of winning a prize in the second starting port 122 and a state in which there is more chance of winning a prize in the second starting port 122 than in a state without electric support. have. Then, under a predetermined condition such as, for example, triggered by the number of lottery of a big hit or a special symbol lottery, the state is controlled to be either a state without electric support or a state with electric support. The electric support state is, for example, one or more of shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. It is a gaming state controlled by the combination.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a time-saving state in which the special symbol fluctuation time is long and a time-saving state in which the special symbol fluctuation time is shorter than the time-saving no state.
In the present embodiment, the electric support state and the time saving state are controlled at the same time. Further, in the following description, the electric support state and the time saving state are simply referred to as the time saving state, and the electric support non-state and the time saving non-state are simply referred to as the time saving non-state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as other accessories related to winning and lottery, a large winning opening 125 as a special electric accessory that opens according to the result of the special symbol lottery and a lottery even if the game ball wins are performed. A normal winning opening 126 and a normal winning opening 126 are arranged on the game board 110. The large winning opening 125 is provided with a large winning opening door 125D that opens and closes the large winning opening 125. In the following description, the opening / closing state and opening / closing operation of the large winning opening door 125D may be described as the opening / closing state and opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 125 for convenience.
In the present embodiment, a display 130 for displaying the lottery result and the number of holdings is arranged at the lower left position of the game board 110.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a game control board for determining the winning of a special symbol, an effect control board for comprehensively controlling the effect, an image control board for controlling the effect by images and sounds, various lamps, and the like. Various substrates (not shown) such as a lamp control substrate that controls the effect of the movable accessory 115 are attached. Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power supply into a DC power supply and outputs it to various boards or the like is arranged.

In the game frame 150, when the player touches the handle 151 to rotate the lever 152 in the clockwise direction, the game frame 150 plays a game ball at a predetermined time interval (for example, 100 pieces per minute) with a striking force according to the operation angle. It is equipped with a launcher (not shown) that launches electrically at Further, the game frame 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the launcher one by one at a timing linked to an operation by the player's lever 152, and a game ball that the supply device supplies to the launcher. It includes an upper plate 153 for temporarily storing the upper plate and a lower plate (not shown) provided below the upper plate 153 for holding a game ball falling from the upper plate 153. For example, a payout ball by a payout unit is paid out to the upper plate 153.

Further, the game frame 150 has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the firing of the game ball even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the launching device, and the game ball accumulated in the lower plate. It is provided with an eject button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and ejecting it.
Further, the game frame 150 includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for notifying the gaming state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects by music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects by light such as a pattern due to lighting / blinking and a difference in light emission color. As for the frame lamp 157, a configuration example that enables an effect of changing the light irradiation direction can be considered.
Further, the game frame 150 is provided with a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2A is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 arranged at the lower left of the gaming board 110. FIG. 2B is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100.
As shown in FIG. 2A, the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 wins the first special symbol display 221 and the second starting port 122, which operate in response to the winning of the first starting port 121. It includes a second special symbol display 222 that operates in response to the passage, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates in response to the passage of the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays the lottery result by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays the lottery result by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the winning of the second starting port 122. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the normal symbol display 223 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the lottery result. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof. Similarly, the ordinary symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the display 130 operates in response to the hold on the first special symbol display 221 and the first special symbol hold display 218 and the second special symbol display 222. 2 It is provided with a special symbol hold indicator 219 and a normal symbol hold indicator 220 that operates in response to hold on the normal symbol indicator 223. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the ordinary symbol hold indicator 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of holds is determined by the lighting mode thereof. Is displayed.

Here, the hold will be described. If a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning is being performed), the special symbol is changing. In addition, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning. Therefore, the later winnings are stored up to the specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is until the variable display operation for the first winning game ball is completed. It is put on hold.
In addition, the same processing as for the special symbol is performed for the normal symbol. The fact that such a hold has been made and the number of holds (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the ordinary symbol hold indicator 220.

Further, the display 130 includes a state display 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the present embodiment, the status display 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs lights up to notify whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. In addition, the other one is to notify by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time saving state in which the special symbol fluctuation time is short. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

Further, the display 130 includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the big winning opening 125 is operated in the big hit game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number display 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operating rounds of the big winning opening 125 in the big hit game is displayed depending on the lighting mode.

The game frame 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an input device for the player to input an effect. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of the input device, an effect button 161B, an effect key 162 adjacent to the effect button 161B and composed of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape, and an effect key 162. Is arranged in the game frame 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect of accepting an operation of selecting one image from a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, the player operates the effect key 162 composed of four keys arranged in a cross shape to instruct one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 114, and presses the effect button 161B. By operating it, it is possible to perform an effect such as selecting an instructed image. Further, as the form of the input device, in addition to the illustrated effect button 161B and effect key 162, various input forms such as a lever and a handle can be adopted depending on the content of the effect and the like.

[Control unit configuration]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the image / acoustic control unit and the lamp control unit of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes a game control unit 200 as a main control means for determining the winning of a special symbol or the like. Further, as sub-control means, an effect control unit 300 that comprehensively controls the effect and a payout control unit 330 that controls the payout of payout balls are provided.

[Structure / function of game control unit]
The game control unit 200 is used as a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining the winning of a special symbol, a ROM 202 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 201, and a working memory of the CPU 201. RAM 203 and

The game control unit 200 controls the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in either a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving no state, or a time-saving state. As a result, the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are the high-probability time-saving game state, which is the high-probability state and the time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving game state, which is the low-probability state and the time-saving state, and the high-probability state and the time-saving non-state. It is one of a low-probability time-saving no-game state, a low-probability state, and a low-probability time-saving no-game state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between the high-probability state and the low-probability state, and switches between the time-saving non-state and the time-saving state based on a predetermined condition. Further, the game control unit 200 controls such as making the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher than that in the time saving state, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and the like in the time saving state. I do.

The game control unit 200 draws a special symbol lottery when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 121 or the second start port 122. Then, a special game such as a big hit game is performed according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery. In the special game, the game control unit 200 performs a predetermined number of rounds in which the large winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, is maintained in an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won). Control to repeat only. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the opening / closing operation interval when the big winning opening 125 opens.

In addition, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
Further, the game control unit 200 holds the game ball when the game ball wins the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during the special symbol change, or the game ball passes through the gate 124 during the normal symbol change. Set the hold that occurs as a result.
Further, the game control unit 200 accompanies game control such as determination results of special symbol lottery and normal symbol lottery, change information of high probability state and low probability state, change information of time saving non state and time saving state, hold setting information, and the like. The information is sent to the effect control unit 300 by a command described later.

Further, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the second starting port 122, the large winning opening 125, and the normal winning opening 126, the game control unit 200 hits one game ball according to the place where the game ball wins. An instruction is given to the payout control unit 330 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 121, three prize balls, if a game ball wins in the second starting port 122, four prize balls, and if a game ball wins in the large winning opening 125, 13 prizes. When a game ball wins a ball or a normal winning opening 126, an instruction command is sent to the payout control unit 330 so that 10 prize balls are paid out respectively. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize ball linked to the game ball.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information regarding the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out is managed.

As a detection means, the game control unit 200 includes a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW)) 211 that detects the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121. , To the second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122, the electric tulip opening / closing unit 213 for opening / closing the electric tulip 123, and the gate 124. A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 for detecting the passage of the game ball is connected.
Further, the game control unit 200 is provided with a large winning opening detection unit (large winning opening switch (SW)) 215 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the large winning opening 125 and a large winning opening door 125D of the large winning opening 125. The large winning opening door opening / closing part 216 that sets the closed state and the protruding inclined open state, and the normal winning opening detection unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects the winning of the game ball to the ordinary winning opening 126. , Are connected.

In addition, the game control unit 200 has a first special symbol hold indicator 218 that displays the number of unchanged pieces that have won a prize in the first start port 121 during the change of the special symbol, and a second special symbol hold indicator 218 during the change of the special symbol. The second special symbol hold indicator 219 that displays the number of unchanging holdings that won the starting port 122, and the normal symbol holding indicator that displays the number of unchanging holdings that passed through the gate 124 while the normal symbol was changing. 220 and are connected.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a first special symbol display 221 for displaying the variation display of the special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to the first starting port 121, and a second starting port. The second special symbol display 222 that displays the variation display of the special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to 122, and the normal symbol display that displays the variation display of the normal symbol and the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. The device 223 and the state display 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are connected.

Then, the detection signals detected by the first start port switch 211, the second start port switch 212, the gate switch 214, the large winning opening switch 215, and the normal winning opening switch 217 are sent to the game control unit 200. Further, the control signals from the game control unit 200 are the electric tulip opening / closing unit 213, the grand prize opening / closing unit 216, the first special symbol holding indicator 218, the second special symbol holding indicator 219, and the normal symbol holding indicator 220. , 1st special symbol display 221 and 2nd special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223 and status display 224. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of payout prize balls described above.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected to an external information terminal board 350 for a board that transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits information regarding the number of prize balls paid out, information indicating the state of the game control unit 200, etc. acquired from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350 for the board. To do.

[Configuration / function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of payout balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 331, and a RAM 333 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 331. And have.
Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout of the payout ball based on the command sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won a prize (first starting port 121 or the like). Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out the game ball from the storage unit of the game ball.

Further, the payout control unit 330 includes a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a game ball in the storage unit (not shown). Detects whether or not the ball presence detection unit 336 that detects the presence or absence of storage of the ball and the plate 153 that holds the game ball used when the player plays the game and the paid-out prize ball are in a full state. The full tank detection unit 337 is connected. Then, the payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a frame external information terminal board 340 for transmitting various information to the host computer installed in the hall. Then, the payout control unit 330 may, for example, provide information on the number of prize balls instructed to pay out to the payout drive unit 334, information on the number of actually paid out prize balls detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. Is transmitted to the host computer via the external information terminal board 340 for the frame. Further, the same information is transmitted to the game control unit 200.

[Structure / function of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 301, a RAM 303 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 301, and a date and time. It is equipped with a real-time clock (RTC) 304 that measures the data.
The effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on, for example, a determination result of winning or not winning in the special symbol lottery sent from the game control unit 200 and a fluctuation pattern. At that time, in some cases, the effect content is set according to the operation input in response to the operation input from the user using the effect button 161B or the effect key 162. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161B, and the operation content identified by the operation signal is reflected in the effect setting.
Further, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of the screen display for waiting for customers as one of the effects.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state, and the change information of the time saving non-state and the time saving state received from the game control unit 200.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sends a command instructing the execution of the set effect content to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320.

Further, the effect control unit 300 is connected to an image / sound control unit 310 that controls an effect using images and sound, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls an effect using various lamps and movable accessories 115. Has been done.

[Configuration / function of image / acoustic control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image / sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling an image expressing the effect content and sound, a program executed by the CPU 311 and various data. It includes a ROM 312, a RAM 313 used as a working memory of the CPU 311 and the like, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and an SNDROM 316.

Then, the image / sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 includes a symbol image and a background image to be displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result, a character for displaying a notice effect to the player, and the like. Image data such as items are stored. Further, the SNDROM 316 stores various acoustic data such as music and sound to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, and sound effects such as jingles.
Based on the hold number command or the variable effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300, the CPU 311 analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list summarizing the commands related to drawing, and transmits the display list to the VDP 314. Do.

The VDP 314 reads out the image data and the acoustic data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively, based on the display list received from the CPU 311. Further, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, symbol image display, symbol image variation, character / item display, etc. using the read image data, and voice processing using the read acoustic data. .. Then, the VDP 314 controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 based on the drawn image data. Further, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 by the sound processed sound data.
In the present embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform voice processing in addition to the drawing processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a processor dedicated to voice processing may be provided separately.

[Configuration / function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and a program and various data executed by the CPU 321. It includes a ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a working memory of the CPU 321 and the like.
Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls lighting / blinking, emission color, and the like of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable accessory 115.

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 contains lighting / blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern) of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 300. Data) is stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the effect control unit 300. Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores the operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 based on the read operation pattern data.

In the present embodiment, the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300, the image / sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each main boards arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110. The game control board as a sub-board, the effect control board as a sub-board, the image control board, the lamp control board, and the payout control board are individually configured.
Further, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the effect button 161B and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but are not limited thereto. The effect button 161B and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by the lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Subsequently, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol fluctuation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units for executing various lottery processes. , Ordinary symbol variation control unit 236.
In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with a special symbol change.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a large winning opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units that execute data processing related to motion control of various accessories and prize balls. And an output control unit 240 and a random number control unit 241.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number value used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, the numerical value in a predetermined range is set for each type of random number. One numerical value (random number value) is selected (acquired) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234. As will be described in detail later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not it is a jackpot, a symbol random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
Further, in the case of the random value used for the ordinary symbol lottery, specifically, one numerical value (random value) is selected (acquired) from the numerical values in a predetermined range on condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ). The acquired random number value is usually used for determination by the symbol determination unit 232. As the random numbers used in the ordinary symbol lottery, in addition to the hit random numbers indicating whether or not they are hit, a symbol random number indicating the type of hit, a variable pattern random number, or the like may be set.
When a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 controls the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222 according to the lottery result.

At the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 20 to be described later, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is "whether or not it is a big hit" and "a big hit when a big hit is won". "Type" and "whether it is a small hit or a miss when the big hit is not won" are judged. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. Based on the acquired random number value, the unit 234 determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. The above-mentioned special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) refers to processing by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

Here, the "big hit" is divided into a plurality of types according to the game state generated after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined by the combination of the time saving no state or the time saving state, and the high probability state or the low probability state. That is, as the types of jackpots based on the game state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot that becomes a high-probability time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot in the high-probability time-saving game state) and the low-probability time-saving game state. Big hit (hereinafter, big hit in low probability time saving game state), big hit in high probability time saving no game state (hereinafter, big hit in high probability time saving no game state), big hit in low probability time saving no game state (hereinafter, low) Probability time saving No game state jackpot) is possible. Each of these jackpots is associated with an individual special symbol, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of the special symbol won in the special symbol lottery.

Further, the "big hit" may be divided into a jackpot in which the jackpot game time is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and a jackpot in which the jackpot game time is short and the payout of the game balls can hardly be expected. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". For example, in "long hit", a round in which the open state of the large winning opening 125 is maintained until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). Is done. Further, in the "short hit", a round in which the large winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, when the big hit is not won, the "small hit" is a small hit game in which the big winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Will be done. When the small hit is won, the game state before the small hit is continued even after the small hit game is completed. That is, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state is continued even after the end of the small hit game, and the game state does not shift. Similarly, when the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the low-probability time-saving non-game state is continued even after the end of the small hit game, and the gaming state does not shift.
Further, the "small hit" is a kind of "missing", and none of the above-mentioned gaming states that are advantageous to the player is set.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 can perform a reach effect in the determination result of whether or not to perform the jackpot game and the decorative symbol variation effect accompanying the special symbol variation (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). ), The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the judgment result and the like. Then, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235. Details of the operations of the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, the "reach" is an effect for making the player expect a big hit in the decorative design described later.

The normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol is "win or not" by using a random number table as shown in FIG. 20 (d) described later at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. Further, when a plurality of types of hits are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of hit" when the determination result is a hit. The ordinary symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the ordinary symbol determination unit 232.
When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 controls the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 223 according to the lottery result.
The electric tulip motion control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol lottery determines "hit" by the normal symbol determination unit 232, and a game ball is placed in the second starting port 122. Generate a state that makes it easy to win a prize. Further, when it is determined to be "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later. For example, there are an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds and an operation pattern that opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol lottery determines "big hit" by the special symbol determination unit 234, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 has a big winning opening with an operation pattern specified based on the type of winning jackpot as a big hit game. Controls the opening operation of 125. Further, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 opens the large winning opening 125 for a specified time and a specified number of times as a small hit game when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines that the special symbol lottery is a "small hit". ..
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets a command for managing the number of prizes for various prizes related to winning and lottery and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330.
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at a predetermined timing.

[Basic operation of the game machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 initializes and sets various devices as a basic process at startup. Then, after performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. Further, when the power is cut off, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power cut-off processes.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of the basic processing by the game control unit 200.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, step is referred to as “S”) 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
When the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S602), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the backup flag related to the operation when the power is cut off is ON (S603).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the checksum created when the power is cut off is normal (S604).
When the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), the game control unit 200 then executes the return process (S605). In this return process, the game control unit 200 sets sub-control means such as the effect control unit 300 when returning from the state in which the power supply is cut off. Specifically, the game control unit 200 is in a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, either a high probability state or a low probability state, a time saving state and a time saving no state A command for setting the sub control means is output to the effect control unit 300 so as to reflect any of the above. Further, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S602), the backup flag is OFF (No in S603), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S604), then the game control unit 200 is initialized. As a process, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S606), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub board (sub control means) (S608). The setting of the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) is completed or the sub-board setting (see S608) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for the game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the interrupt enable (S610), interrupt disable (S611), symbol random number control process (S612), initial value random number update process (S613), and power cutoff flag are ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt enable (S610) and interrupt disable (S611) are provided to enable execution of interrupt processing during execution of this loop processing (S610 to S614). In the present embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. The details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in the game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, when the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 performs main control by interrupt together with loop processing (S610 to S614). Repeat the process. On the other hand, when the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts a process for shutting off the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (power cutoff process).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the power cutoff process by the game control unit 200.
In the power cutoff process, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control process of game machine]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko gaming machine 100, instructs the effect control unit 300, which is a sub control means, to control the effect, and gives the payout control unit 330 a prize ball. Instruct the control of the payout.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined fixed time (for example, 4 milliseconds). In the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at preset fixed time intervals, and when the interrupt is enabled in the loop process shown in FIG. 6 (see S610), the main control is performed as the interrupt process. Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control process, random number update process, switch process, symbol process, electric accessory process, prize ball process, and output process are sequentially executed (S801 to S806).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 to update the values of various random numbers used in the game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting the random number and updating the random number value will be described later.

As the switch process (S802), a start port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the start port switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231 to monitor the states of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in FIG. 3, and the switch is turned on. If this happens, the process for the special symbol lottery is executed. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the pre-judgment processing is performed by the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called. Execute the process for pre-judgment.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231 to monitor the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. 3, and when the switch is turned on, it is for a normal symbol lottery. Execute the process.
The detailed contents of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), a special symbol processing and a normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing associated with the symbol variation. To do.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol variation control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol variation and the processing associated with the symbol variation.
The detailed contents of these symbol processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), a large winning opening processing and an electric tulip processing are performed.
In the large winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the large winning opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the large winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip motion control unit 238 and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is an ordinary electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processing will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for managing the number of prizes and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prize.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process from S802 to S804, and is stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S805 and is stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 examines the storage area of each control command of the RAM 203 in order, and if the control command is stored in each storage area (that is, the control command is generated by the processing of S802 to S805). (B), the control command is read and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the output process is performed at the end of a series of main control processes. That is, the commands generated in each of the processes S802 to S805 by the above functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each of the processes. Then, after these processes, the output control unit 240 as the second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process accumulated in the storage area of the RAM 203. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the command generated in the execution of the one cycle is output after the last command generation in the execution of the one cycle is performed.

[Modification example of basic operation of game machine]
In the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and the main control processing including a series of processing is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control process may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and the specific realization means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 6 to 8. For example, the main control process may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the process may return to the main control process at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Further, while incorporating the main control process into a series of operations of the basic process, an interrupt is generated at regular intervals as in the operation described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, and if an interrupt occurs. It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated during the basic process.

Further, when outputting the command generated in the basic processing, as a general rule, each time the command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240 which is the second processing means is called. Output. The basic process is different from the main control process related to the progress of the game, and is a special process such as an initial operation performed only when the power is turned on. In addition, since the processing procedure of the basic processing may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated command is promptly output so that there is no omission in the output processing. It is a process. In addition, in response to a specific processing request such as when commands are continuously generated by a plurality of related processes, a processing procedure is adopted in which a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and output collectively. You may.

[Random number update processing by the game control unit]
Random number values as determination information used for various lottery in game control such as special symbol lottery are counted by a counter, and the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. 8 starts from a predetermined initial value. One is added each time it is done. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is acquired by the start port switch process (FIG. 9) and the gate switch process (FIG. 10), and is used in the special symbol process (FIG. 11) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 16). To. This random number value counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number value reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20A described later). , Returns to the initial value again. Further, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, the winning value may be estimated based on the update interval and the information of the initial value. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 6, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Starting port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch process among the switch processes shown in S802 of FIG.
In this start port switch process, a process for winning a prize at the first start port 121 and a process for winning a prize at the second start port 122 are sequentially performed. With reference to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 has been turned on (S901). When the first start port switch 211 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the number of unchanged hold numbers U1 in the winning of the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit value (S902). .. In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to 4. When the number of holds U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S902), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so that the processing for winning at the first starting port 121 ends.

On the other hand, when the hold number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the determination by the winning this time and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). .. Here, since the first starting port 121 is won, a random number value for a special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined by the random value in the subsequent special symbol processing. The random number values referred to here are the jackpot random value that determines the jackpot, small hit or miss, and the type of jackpot (time saving state or time saving no state after the end of the big hit game, high probability state and low probability state, long hit, short). The symbol random value (big hit symbol random value) that determines the hit), the fluctuation pattern random value for specifying the fluctuation pattern in the symbol fluctuation, and the reach random value that determines whether or not to perform the effect with reach described later when the symbol is missed. , Etc. are included.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S904). In the pre-judgment process, a random number is generated by a special symbol process for a winning ball (holding ball) whose random number has already been acquired by winning a prize at the starting port but has not yet been determined by the special symbol process described later. This is a process of determining the random number (pre-determination) before the determination.

Then, the effect control unit 300 of the present embodiment determines the random number by the special symbol processing based on the determination result (pre-determination result) of the random number determined by the pre-determination process, and the determination result is notified. Before that, a notice effect suggesting the determination result can be performed. In this advance notice effect, for example, the image display unit responds to the occurrence of a winning ball (holding ball) in which the random number has already been acquired by winning the prize at the starting port but the random number has not yet been determined by the special symbol processing. It is performed by using the hold display effect (described later) displayed on 114. The advance notice effect based on this advance determination suggests to the player the determination result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing with respect to the reserved ball corresponding to the advance determination related to the advance determination. As a result, the player can play the game with expectation for the reserved ball. The details of the advance notice production based on the preliminary judgment will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S905).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S906).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U1 due to S905 in the RAM 203 (S907), and ends the process for winning the prize at the first start port 121. ..

Next, processing for winning a prize at the second starting port 122 is performed. With reference to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 122 and the second start port switch 212 has been turned on (S908). When the second start port switch 212 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the number of unchanged hold numbers U2 in the winning of the second start port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S909). ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to 4. When the number of holds U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S909), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so that the processing for winning at the second starting port 122 ends.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery by this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). .. Here, since the second starting port 122 is won, the random number values for the special symbol lottery (big hit random value, jackpot symbol random value, reach random value, variable pattern random value, etc.) are acquired in the same manner as in S903 above. To. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S911). The content of this pre-determination process is the same as that of S904 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S912).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S913).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U2 due to S912 in the RAM 203 (S914), and ends the process for winning a prize at the second start port 122. ..

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch process when the game ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 is turned on (S1001). When the gate switch 214 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the number of unchanged holdings G is less than the upper limit (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of holds G has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so the gate switch process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of holds G is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery by this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). .. Here, since the gate 124 is a prize, a random number value (a winning random number value, etc.) for a normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the hold number G (S1004).
After the value of the hold number G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number G increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number G by S1004 (S1005). The process for winning a prize at the gate 124 is terminated.

[Special symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing among the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON in the flag setting (hereinafter, flag setting) set in the RAM 203 (hereinafter, flag setting). S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

When the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already in the jackpot, so the special symbol processing is completed without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1101). On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), the special symbol variation control unit 233 then determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the special symbol variation (S1102). When the special symbol is not changing (No in S1102), the special symbol change control unit 233 then performs processing related to the pending numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the unchanged portion of the special symbol (S1103 to S1106). In the present embodiment, since the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding starting port. ..

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether the number of reservations U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the number of holds U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of holds U2 (S1104). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2 = 0 (No in S1103), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 then determines whether the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the number of holds U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of holds U1 (S1106). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U1 = 0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no prize for starting the lottery of the special symbol, so the special symbol change is not started and the customer waiting setting process of another routine is performed. Is executed to end the process (S1116).
In this embodiment, the process related to the number of reservations U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is prioritized. That is, when the number of holds U2 is 1 or more, the process for the number of holds U2 is performed, and when the number of holds U2 = 0, the process for the number of holds U1 is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 is won, the number of holds U1 and U2 can be subtracted in the order of winning.

After subtracting the hold number U1 or the hold number U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process by another routine (S1108, S1109). Although details will be described later, setting information for fluctuation of the special symbol (big hit symbol, game) that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The state, fluctuation pattern, etc.) are determined. It should be noted that these pieces of information are included in the fluctuation start command sent to the effect control unit 300.

After that, the special symbol variation control unit 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 shown in FIG. 2 based on the setting contents determined by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The change of the special symbol is started (S1110). Then, a fluctuation start command including setting information (big hit symbol, game state, fluctuation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The fluctuation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

When it is determined in S1102 that the special symbol is changing (Yes in S1102), or after the change start command is set in S1111, the special symbol change control unit 233 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1112). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in S1110 has reached the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern selection process of S1109. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation is continued, so that the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 first determines the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 in the jackpot determination process of S1108. It stops at the symbol determined in (S1113). A variable stop command for stopping the decorative symbol described later is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, the stopped processing of another routine is executed (S1115). The details of the stopped processing will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

[Big hit judgment processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the special symbol lottery this time (S1201), and determines whether or not it is a jackpot or a small hit (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not a jackpot or a small hit is determined is whether or not the value of the jackpot random number acquired in S903 or S910 in FIG. 9 matches the value set as the jackpot winning value or the value set as the small hit winning value. It is determined by determining whether or not (see FIG. 20 (a)).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a big hit (Yes in S1202), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (big hit in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, jackpot in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, etc.) is determined. Which jackpot will be won is determined by which of the values preset for each type of jackpot matches the value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 (FIG. 20 (Fig. 20). b) See).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (big hit symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1204).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a symbol indicating that it is a small hit (hereinafter, small hit symbol) as setting information. Set in RAM 203 (S1206).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses the symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter, the missed symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection process by the game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or a time saving state, and a high probability state or a low probability state). (S1301). Then, using the determination result of S1202 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved in this special symbol lottery (S1302). Then, in the case of a big hit (Yes in S1302), the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 reads the fluctuation pattern table for the big hit from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, if there is no big hit (No in S1302), then the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 determines a random number value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect for the player to expect a big hit. (S1304). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches the preset value (see FIG. 20 (c)). ..
When the reach effect is performed as a result of the determination using the random value (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1306). Further, when the reach effect is not performed (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for disengagement from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation time 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) prepared in advance and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number. It is a table associated with.

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 determines the fluctuation pattern random value using the fluctuation pattern random value acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the fluctuation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 (S1308). ). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203, and selects the variation pattern according to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or a time saving state, and a high probability state or a low probability state), and the result of a special symbol lottery (whether or not a big hit is made). , If there is no big hit, whether or not to perform reach effect), etc., the reference variation pattern table is different, so the determined variation pattern is different.

After that, the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 sets the fluctuation pattern selected in S1308 in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1309). The fluctuation pattern setting information set in S1309 is included in the fluctuation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. The details of the fluctuation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stop by the game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopped processing (S1115 of FIG. 11).
In this stopped processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the flag indicating the time saving state (hereinafter, the time saving flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) J in the time saving state (S1402), and whether or not the lottery number J becomes 0. (S1403). Then, if the number of lottery times J = 0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned off (S1404). The operation of turning on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401), after turning off the time saving flag in S1404, or when the value of the lottery number J after subtraction in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then the game control The unit 200 checks whether or not the flag indicating the high probability state (hereinafter, the high probability flag) is turned ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). If both the high-probability flag and the previous time-saving flag are ON, the game is in the high-probability time-saving game state, and if the high-probability flag is ON and the time-saving flag is OFF, the game is in the high-probability time-saving non-game state. is there.

When the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) X in the high probability state (S1406), and has the lottery number X become 0? Check whether or not (S1407). Then, if the number of lottery times X = 0 (Yes in S1407), the high accuracy flag is turned off (S1408). The operation of turning on the high accuracy flag and the setting of the initial value of the number of lottery times X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the high accuracy flag is OFF (No in S1405), after the high accuracy flag is turned OFF in S1408, or when the value of the lottery count X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not a big hit has been made in this special symbol lottery (S1409). Then, in the case of a big hit (Yes in S1409), the game control unit 200 then determines the type of big hit (S1410). Here, as an example of determining the type of jackpot, whether or not it is a long hit is determined.

Here, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit can be made based on the determination result of the big hit determination process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 20B, which will be described later, is set, it is Yes in S1409. If a missed symbol or a small hit symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the result is No in S1409.

When the type of jackpot is long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the big hit game state (long hit game state) in which the type of big hit is a long hit. In addition, here, in the long hit, there is no distinction between a high probability state and a low probability state. Whether it becomes a high probability state or a low probability state is specified by turning on the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the type of big hit is not a long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the big hit game state (short hit game state) in which the type of big hit is a short hit. As in the case of long hits, short hits do not distinguish between high-probability states and low-probability states.

After turning on the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery numbers J and X (S1413). Further, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, when the high accuracy flag is ON in S1405 and the lottery number X is not 0 in S1407, the high accuracy flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the values of the lottery numbers J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation (S1417). Here, the content of the opening operation differs depending on which of S1411 and S1412 the winning game flag is turned ON. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery.
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the opening command for performing the effect in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1418), and ends the stopped processing. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a big hit (No in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of this special symbol lottery is a small hit (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the stopped processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is a small hit (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts the small hit game (S1416). As a result, the game state setting of the RAM 203 becomes the small hit game state. In the small hit game, as described above, the large winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state.

When the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, so the process ends as it is (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns the customer waiting flag ON (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. The customer waiting flag is set in a state where the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and there is no hold.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing among the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol lottery is won. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip process (FIG. 19) described later, and it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game is already in the auxiliary game state and the normal symbol is stopped. Therefore, the normal symbol processing is terminated without starting the normal symbol change (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 then determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the normal symbol variation (S1602). When the normal symbol is not changing (No in S1602), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 then determines whether the number of pending numbers G (see FIG. 10) of the unchanged portion of the normal symbol is 1 or more (S1603). When the number of holds G = 0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no prize for starting the lottery of the normal symbol, so the process ends without starting the normal symbol change.

On the other hand, when the number of holds G is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of holds G (S1604). Then, the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the ordinary symbol lottery this time, and determines whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won (S1605). Whether or not the winning value is determined is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in the table or the like shown in FIG. It is determined.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1606). That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the symbol representing the winning (hereinafter, the winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as the setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S1607). This fluctuation time is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14, and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18 described later. That is, when the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting by S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). Will be done. After this setting, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 starts the normal symbol fluctuation in the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIGS. 2 (a) and 3 based on the setting contents of S1607 (S1608). It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value of the normal symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value of the normal symbol. By judging, the fluctuation time is set.

After starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined in S1602 that the normal symbol is changing (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1609). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol in S1608 has reached the fluctuation time set in S1607. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation is continued, so that the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time ends (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1605 is a winning (S1611). If it is won (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is missed (No in S1611), the normal symbol processing is completed without turning on the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning opening processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large winning opening processing among the electric accessory processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In this big prize opening process, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the big hit game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning in the jackpot 125, so the jackpot processing ends (No in S1701). On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1701), the jackpot motion control unit 237 then opens the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the motion control at the time of the jackpot started in the stopped processing (FIG. 14). It is determined whether or not the operation is in progress (S1702).

When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is opening (Yes in S1702), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the preset opening operation should be performed (opening time). (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the large winning opening 125 is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the large winning opening 125 (S1704) and initializes the winning number C (C = 0). Then (S1705), the value of the number of rounds R of operation of the large winning opening 125 is added by 1 from the current value (S1706), and the large winning opening 125 is started (opened) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the large winning opening 125 and the number of rounds (the number of operation rounds) to be operated by the operation pattern are set. As an example of the case where the big winning opening 125 operates, there are a case where it is a big hit of a long hit or a short hit and a case where it is a small hit in a special symbol lottery. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are set variously according to the types of these hits. In the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the jackpot 125 is operated a plurality of times (multiple rounds) in succession. As an example, in the case of a long hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and in one round, 29.5 seconds of opening is performed once. In the case of a short hit, for example, two rounds (2R) are operated, and in one round, 0.9 seconds are opened once. To further explain, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, for example, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, comparing the operation with a short hit and the operation with a small hit in the above example, the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed twice. That is, the operation of the large winning opening 125 seen by the player is the same in the case of the short hit and the case of the small hit, and the short hit and the small hit are distinguished only from the operation of the large winning opening 125 on the game board 110. Can't.

In the case of a small hit, the law stipulates that the cumulative opening time of the large winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (long hit or short hit), the big winning opening 125 must be opened a plurality of times in a row. Therefore, when it is difficult to visually distinguish between the operation with a small hit and the operation with a short hit as described above, in the case of a small hit, the cumulative opening time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds. An operation mode in which the large winning opening 125 is opened twice or more is set, and in the short hit, the same number of rounds as the number of open small hits is set.

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the large winning opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 has a specified number C of winnings in the large winning opening 125 (for example, 9). It is determined whether or not the number is greater than or equal to (S1709). If the opening time has not passed and the winning number C is less than the specified number, the operating state (opening state) of the large winning opening 125 is continued, so that the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, when the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or the number of winnings C reaches the specified number (Yes in S1709), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the large winning opening 125 (closing). (S1710).

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number of rounds R of operation of the large winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). Then, if the maximum value is not reached, the remaining operations are performed, so that the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1711).

When the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the big hit game flag among the ending operations set in each of the long hit game and the short hit game.
After that, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 sets the ending command in the RAM 203 to perform the effect in the ending operation according to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), and then performs an ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is preset. It is determined whether or not the desired time (ending time) has passed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717), then the big prize opening operation control unit 237 turns off the big hit game flag after the game state setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1718). The large winning opening process is completed (S1719). The content of the game state setting process will be described later.

When it is determined in S1702 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1702), then the grand prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not it is in the ending (S1715). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes in S1715), the operations after S1717 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending (No in S1715), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the large winning opening 125 is operating (opening) (S1716). Then, if it is not in operation (No in S1716), the operation after S1705 is executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1716), the operation after S1708 is executed.
It should be noted that the effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish between the short hit and the small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 of FIG. 17 as a premise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of the jackpot (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These determinations can be made based on, for example, the type of symbol set in the RAM 203 as setting information in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12). Since these determinations are substantially the same as those of S1202, S1203, and S1205 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the determination results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1801), the game state is not changed, so the game state setting process ends.
When the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802, Yes in S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the low-probability time-saving game state. Further, the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the lottery number J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low-probability time-saving game state is performed 100 times, the low-probability time-saving game state ends and the low-probability time-saving non-game state is reached.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving non-game state (No in S1801, Yes in 1802, No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag. finish. Therefore, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 for the game after the jackpot is a low-probability time-saving non-game state.

When the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801 and S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807) and sets the initial value of the number of lottery J. (S1808). In this case, the initial value of the lottery number J is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. Further, the game control unit 200 turns on the high accuracy flag (S1809) and sets the initial value of the lottery number X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the high-probability time-saving game state. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-saving game state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-saving game state ends, and the low-probability time-saving non-game state is established.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving non-game state (No in S1801, S1802, S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on only the high-probability flag (S1809), and the initial value of the number of lottery X (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the high-probability time-saving non-game state. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-saving no-game state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-saving no-game state ends, and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is established.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing among the electric accessory processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip motion control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 is not opened, so the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the electric tulip motion control unit 238 then determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is operating (S1902).

When the electric tulip 123 is not operating (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903) and operates the electric tulip 123 in the set operation pattern (S1904). .. Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804 and S1807 in FIG. For example, when the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting by S1903, an operation pattern of opening once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and when the time saving flag is ON, opening of 1.80 seconds. An operation pattern that opens three times in time is set. In this way, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when the time saving state is in the state), the electric tulip 123 is opened a plurality of times for a long time, and it becomes easy to win a prize in the second starting port 122 (electric chew support). Is done. In addition, a plurality of operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 when the time saving flag is ON or OFF are prepared, and the operation is performed according to the type of hit determined by the normal symbol processing (see FIG. 16). It may be configured to set a pattern.

When it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S1902), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1904, the electric tulip motion control unit 238 elapses the opening time in the set operation pattern. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1905). If the opening time has not elapsed, the operating state (opening state) of the electric tulip 123 is continued, so that the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1905). On the other hand, when the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip motion control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Random number judgment method]
Here, a random number determination method performed in a jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), a variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), a normal symbol process (FIG. 16), and the like will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a random number (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
FIG. 20 (a) shows a configuration example of a jackpot random number used in a special symbol lottery, FIG. 20 (b) shows a configuration example of a jackpot symbol random number used in a special symbol lottery, and FIG. 20 (c) shows a special symbol lottery. A configuration example of the reach random number used and a configuration example of the winning random number used in the ordinary symbol lottery are shown in FIG. 20 (d), respectively.

With reference to FIG. 20A, as the determination value of the jackpot random number, the jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is a low probability state and the jackpot when the gaming state at the time of jackpot determination is a high probability state. Two types and small hits are set. The range of random numbers (big hit random numbers) is 300, from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. Further, in the case of a special symbol lottery in a high probability state, 10 winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (= 1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, when the start ports 121 and 122 are won in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery is performed, the winning probability is 10 times higher than in the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the low probability state. Further, the winning value of the small hit is set to three regardless of whether it is in the low probability state or the high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (= 1/100).
Here, if a special symbol lottery in a low probability state is explained as an example, the jackpot random number values (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 are shown in FIG. 20. It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value "5" of the jackpot lottery in the low probability state in (a). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery for small hits.

With reference to FIG. 20B, five types of jackpot symbols are prepared: low-probability symbol A, low-probability symbol B, high-probability symbol A, high-probability symbol B, and latent symbol. Here, the low-probability symbol A and the low-probability symbol B are symbols indicating that they are jackpots in the low-probability state, and among them, the low-probability symbol A is a jackpot in a long hit (8 rounds) and a low-probability short-time gaming state. Indicates that there is. The low-probability symbol B indicates that it is a long hit (4 rounds) and a big hit in a low-probability short-time gaming state. The high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol B indicate that they are long hits (15 rounds) and big hits in a high-probability short-time gaming state. The high-probability symbol C and the high-probability symbol D indicate that they are long hits (8 rounds) and big hits in a high-probability short-time gaming state. The high-probability symbol E indicates a short hit (2 rounds) and a high-probability short-time non-game state jackpot. The latent probability symbol is a symbol indicating that it is a short hit (2 rounds) and a big hit in a high-probability short-time non-game state. Therefore, the high-probability symbol B and the latent probability symbol have the same gaming state after the jackpot game, but the latent probability symbol is a condition for performing a latent effect that does not clearly notify the player that the high-probability symbol is in the high-probability state. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high-probability symbol B. The range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249. Further, in the jackpot symbol random number, winning values are set for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, which trigger the special symbol lottery.

In the low-probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. Therefore, if the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol A is 35/250 (= 7/50).
In the low-probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol B is 15/250 (= 3/50).

In the high-probability symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the high probability symbol A is 20/250 (= 2/25).
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning the high probability symbol A is 150/250 (= 15/25).

In the high-probability symbol B, five values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the high probability symbol B is 5/250 (= 1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 25/250 (= 1/10).

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol C is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 10/250 (= 1/25).

In the high-probability symbol D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the high probability symbol D is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning the high probability symbol D is 10/250 (= 1/25).

In the high-probability symbol E, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the high probability symbol E is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning the high probability symbol E is 5/250 (= 1/50).

In the latent probability symbol, 100 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the latent symbol is 100/250 (= 2/5).
On the other hand, the winning value in the latent probability symbol is not assigned to the second starting port 122, and if the second starting port 122 is won, the winning value in the latent probability symbol will not be won.

Here, to explain using the low-probability symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random value (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is shown in FIG. 20 (b). ), It is determined whether or not the value matches the winning value of the low-probability symbol A, "0 to 34". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery such as the low probability symbol B.

As described above, by making the winning probability of the type of jackpot different between the case where the first starting port 121 is won and the case where the second starting port 122 is won, various playability can be provided. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 on the game board 110 is devised so that it becomes easier to aim at either the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 in a specific state (mode). It is also possible to encourage the player to participate in a more active game by configuring the above.

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be described. The reach random number is set according to the number of holdings as described later. Here, as an example, a reach random number when the number of pending numbers is 0 will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20 (c), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and 22 random number values are assigned to the lottery result (with reach) for performing the reach effect, and the lottery without the reach effect is performed. 228 random numbers are assigned to the result (no reach). That is, in the illustrated example, if a big hit is not made in the special symbol lottery, the reach effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (= 11/125). Here, the reach effect is an effect performed on the image display unit 114 when the special symbol changes. Hereinafter, the effect when the special symbol changes without the reach effect is referred to as a non-reach effect, and the reach effect is also referred to as a reach effect.

Here, demonstrating the presence of reach as an example, the reach random value (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is the reach in FIG. 20 (c). It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value of "0 to 21". Although detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, it is linked to the display control of the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 (hereinafter, when these are not distinguished, they are referred to as special symbol indicators 221, 222). , The image display unit 114 performs an effect using a decorative pattern. The decorative design is configured by displaying, for example, three rows of symbols consisting of a number sequence in which numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction. Then, at the same time that the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 221, 222 is started, the decorative symbol displayed on the image display unit 114 starts scrolling. In addition, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (the start of scrolling of the decorative symbol), the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the decorative symbol is also stopped. In general, when the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, in the stop display of the decorative symbol, three identical numbers are lined up in a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally. The effect using the decorative pattern performed along with the variable display of the special pattern is called a variable effect.

In the effect with reach, the following operations are performed with respect to the decorative pattern as a variable effect. First, when the decorative symbols scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, first, any two symbols (sequence) are stopped first. At this time, the same numbers are stopped and displayed on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. To further explain, if the decorative pattern is scrolled in the vertical direction, the same number is stopped and displayed in a row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the last row gradually slows down the scrolling speed, giving the player the expectation that three identical numbers will line up in a straight line. In such a reach effect, the SP reach effect or the SP / SP reach effect may be performed before the scrolling of the last row is stopped. The SP reach production is generally called super reach or special reach, and is a production that expects a bigger hit than the reach, and is a production of moving images in which various characters appear and the story develops. .. In addition, SP / SP reach is generally called super super reach or special special reach, and it is a production that expects a bigger hit than SP reach, and it is a moving image in which various characters appear and the story unfolds. It is a production of.
Further, as shown in FIG. 21 described later, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), the SP reach or the SP / SP reach effect is set to be executed. .. It should be noted that the above-mentioned variable effect performed together with the effect with reach is also referred to as a variable effect during reach.
On the other hand, in the non-reach production, when the decorative symbols scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, the production that gives the player a sense of expectation like the reach production is not performed. , The symbol is stopped and displayed when the same numbers are not aligned on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally.

As described above, the reach random number is for determining whether the image display unit 114 performs the effect with reach or the effect without reach when the result of the determination of the jackpot random number is lost. The effect with reach appears with a probability, and the player is given an appropriate sense of expectation.
In addition, if the jackpot is won, the effect with reach will be performed, and finally the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed with the same numbers aligned on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. Can be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning a small hit or losing, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the above straight line with the same numbers not aligned.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the ordinary symbol lottery will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20 (d), the range of random numbers is 10 from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and as the winning value when the time saving flag is ON. Nine values are assigned. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the state of no time saving, the player wins with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the time saving state, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, when the time saving flag OFF is described as an example, the winning random value (see S1003) acquired when the game ball of the gate 124, the first starting port 121, or the second starting port 122 passes through is shown in FIG. 20 (see S1003). It is determined whether or not the value matches "0", which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the ordinary symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

Further, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of hits having different contents (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) of the auxiliary game to be performed when it is determined to be a hit in the ordinary symbol lottery. In this case, for example, a winning symbol random number for specifying the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set as in the case of the jackpot symbol random number for specifying the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery (see FIG. 17B). Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the hit symbol random number together with the random number value of the hit random number by the gate switch process (see FIG. 10) by the random number acquisition unit 231 and is acquired by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Identify the type of hit based on the random number value.
The range of random numbers, the ratio of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the values shown.

[Example of setting fluctuation pattern]
Next, a variation pattern and a table setting example used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a variation pattern and a table setting example used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 21 shows a setting example of a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Although not shown, for other gaming states such as the high-probability time-saving gaming state, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is individually provided.
Further, FIG. 21 shows a setting example when the game ball wins the first starting port 121. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 122, a table for setting the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process may be individually provided, or the game ball wins in the first starting port 121. The table to be referred to in some cases may be shared and referred to.

As shown in FIG. 21, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the fluctuation pattern random number. .. Specifically, in the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. Determine the variation pattern based on what you do. For example, when the jackpot symbol is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 69" assigned to "high probability symbol A" in FIG. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. The special symbol fluctuation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

Further, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is incorrect (No in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 is based on the hold number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number. To determine the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, when the hold number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "0", the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 receives the reach random number value (see S903) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value. , It is determined whether the number is allocated to the reach random number range "0 to 21" or the reach random number range "22 to 249" allocated to the reserved number "0" of "off" in FIG. When the acquired reach random number is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21", the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 is the reach random number range "0 to 21". The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which of the fluctuation pattern random number values assigned to "21" is matched. For example, when the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR4" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200 has the fluctuation pattern random value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball wins the start ports 121 and 122, and the game state and reach of the pachinko game machine 100. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the conditions such as the presence or absence of the effect and the number of holds. Then, the information on the fluctuation pattern of the determined special symbol is included in the fluctuation start command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. As will be described later, the effect control unit 300 corresponds to the variation time specified based on the information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command (executable in the variation time) as the effect when the special symbol changes. Is selected and executed.

[Structure of RAM of game control unit and RAM of effect control unit for performing advance notice effect based on prior determination]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in the present embodiment for executing the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control unit 200 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 22A.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the RAM 203 includes a storage area 204 as a special symbol hold storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers acquired by the jackpot random number lottery. The storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 (when the upper limit of each holding number is 4). .. Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage unit. It has a unit 204 g and an eighth storage unit 204 h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area in which information representing the distinction between the winning start ports (first start port 121 or second start port 122) is stored. It has an area where the acquired jackpot random number is stored, an area where the symbol random number is stored, an area where the reach random number is stored, and an area where the variation pattern random number is stored. That is, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are stored in each of the storage units 204a to 204h.

Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when a random number is already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the effect control unit 300 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23A is a block diagram showing the configurations of the reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 23B is a block diagram showing the configurations of the storage units shown in FIG. 23A.
As shown in FIG. 23A, the RAM 303 includes a first hold storage area 305 and a second hold storage area 306 as hold status storage areas for storing the state in which the hold ball is held. The first reserved storage area 305 and the second reserved storage area 306 correspond to a hold for winning a prize in the first starting port 121 and a holding for winning a prize in the second starting port 122, respectively, and each has four storage units. Have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage unit 305a, a second storage unit 305b, a third storage unit 305c, and a fourth storage unit 305d. Further, the second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage unit 306a, a second storage unit 306b, a third storage unit 306c, and a fourth storage unit 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23B, each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d has a hold flag storage area for turning on / off the hold flag and a notification flag storage for turning on / off the notification flag. Has an area and. The hold flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of the hold ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of holdings due to winning the first starting port 121 is 3, the holding flag is turned ON in the three holding flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform a warning effect for each reserved ball based on a preliminary determination result. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform a preliminary effect based on the preliminary determination result according to the game state and the state of the effect. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the advance notice effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the advance notice effect is not performed. For example, when the advance notice effect is given to the third reserved ball among the above three reserved balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

That is, the RAM 203 and the RAM 303 function as storage means in the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 to store hold information which is start information based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition up to a predetermined number. Further, the game control unit 200 is in a special game state before the determination of the special symbol determination unit 234 triggered by the establishment of the start condition corresponding to the start information is performed based on the hold information which is the start information. It is a pre-determination means that performs a pre-determination process regarding whether or not to shift to. The effect control unit 300 is an effect control means for performing a notice effect for notifying (suggesting) a preliminary determination result.

Further, although not particularly shown, the RAM 203 has an area in which pre-determination information is stored (hereinafter, a pre-determination information storage area), in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 22A. The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on each of the above random numbers. The content of the pre-judgment information is the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11). Specifically, whether or not a big hit (and whether or not a small hit) and a big hit If it is, it is information for indicating the type of the jackpot, whether the content of the production is a production with reach or a production without reach, and the content of the fluctuation pattern (variation time). The pre-judgment information stored in the pre-judgment information storage area is unique to the hold information (hereinafter referred to as hold information) corresponding to the winning ball (holding ball) for which the pre-judgment processing has been performed, or separately from this hold information. At the timing, it is included in the pre-determination result command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
Next, the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process according to the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 24-1 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination process (S904, S911 in FIG. 9) according to the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 24-1, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state (S2401), and if it determines that the game state is a high probability state (Yes in S2401), the high probability state. The table for the jackpot is selected, and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2402). On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2401, the table for the low probability state is selected, and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2403).

After the pre-determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number of S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S2404), and determines that the game state is the time saving state (Yes in S2404). A table for the time saving state is selected, and the reach random number is pre-determined (S2405). Further, a table for the time saving state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2406).
On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2404, the table for the time saving stateless state is selected and the reach random number is preliminarily determined (S2407). Further, a table for the time saving stateless state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2408).

After that, the game control unit 200 obtains the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot symbol random number, the result of the pre-determination of the reach random number, and the result of the pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. It is stored in the pre-determination information storage area as the pre-determination information (S2409). Further, in order to transmit the pre-determination information to the effect control unit 300, a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-mentioned pre-judgment includes a random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122, and a determination table used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20). The judgment table having the same configuration as (see) was used. That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine of the jackpot determination process (see S1108 and FIG. 12 in FIG. 11) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the above-mentioned preliminary determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining a random number separately from the jackpot determination process in order to determine the random number in the pre-determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program related to the jackpot determination process and the advance determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the pre-judgment has the same configuration as the determination table used for the jackpot determination, the determination table used for the jackpot determination may also be used for the pre-determination.

Further, although only the preliminary determination (whether or not it is a big hit) regarding the special symbol lottery has been described here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol is also pre-read (preliminary determination). I do. For the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol lottery, the random value for the fluctuation pattern selection (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) and the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 21) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122. (See) and (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11). Therefore, even in the look-ahead of the fluctuation pattern, the random value for selecting the fluctuation pattern acquired at the time of winning and the look-ahead table having the same configuration as the fluctuation pattern table used in the fluctuation pattern selection processing of the special symbol processing are used for selection. Fluctuation patterns can be pre-read.

In this case, in order to pre-read the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Further, as the look-ahead table used for the look-ahead of the fluctuation pattern selection, the fluctuation pattern table used in the fluctuation pattern selection processing of the special symbol processing may be used. With this configuration, the number of control instructions related to look-ahead of variation pattern selection can be reduced, and an increase in the size of the program can be suppressed.

If the pre-judgment process and the jackpot judgment process at the time of special symbol change are performed by the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so that the pre-judgment result and the special symbol change time. The judgment result by the jackpot judgment processing of the above may be different. That is, it is a case where the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state, time saving state or time saving no state) of the pachinko gaming machine 100 has changed by the start of the special symbol change after the execution of the pre-determination process. In this case, since different types of determination tables are used depending on the game state, the specific determination table used for the determination differs between the execution of the pre-judgment process and the execution of the jackpot determination process. .. Therefore, even if the same random number value acquired at the time of winning the starting ports 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, if the game state changes by the start of the special symbol change after the pre-determination process is executed in the effect control unit 300, the effect based on the pre-determination result is not executed (prohibited) control or the like. You may do.

[Command configuration and transmission method]
Here, the configuration and transmission method of commands (commands for effect control and commands for setting) output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 24-2 is a diagram showing a command configuration. FIG. 24-2 (a) shows the data structure of the command, and FIG. 24-2 (b) shows the structure as a bit string of the command.

As shown in FIG. 24-2 (a), one command is composed of two bytes in the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. This command is composed of a 1-byte "code" as a first data part and a 1-byte "data" as a second data part. "Code" indicates the type of command, and "data" indicates the value of the command. This command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 by using one serial signal and using the pace synchronization. More generally, the "code" which is the first data part is the size of a bit (a is an integer of 2 or more), and the value of the first 1 bit is specified as either 1 or 0. The "data" which is the second data part has a size of n × a bit (n is an integer of 1 or more), and the value of the first 1 bit is different from the value of the first 1 bit of the first data part. Specified by value.

Since the pace synchronization is used, a 1-bit start bit (bit described as "S" in the figure) is provided at the beginning of each of the "code" and "data" constituting the command, and 1 is provided at the end. The end bit of the bit (the bit described as "E" in the figure) is provided. Further, each of the "code" and the "data" constituting the command is provided with a 1-bit parity bit (a bit described as "P" in the figure).

As shown in FIG. 24-2 (a), both the "code" and the "data" constituting the command have a data size of 1 byte (8 bits). Then, when transmitted, the "code" and the "data" are provided with a start bit, an end bit, and a parity bit, respectively. Therefore, in the effect control unit 300 that receives the command, it is not easy to identify whether the received data string is the "code" or the "data" of the command from the outer shape of the data string. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a flag for identifying the "code" and the "data" is set. Specifically, the value of the specific part of the 8-bit value constituting the "code" and the value of the part corresponding to the specific part of the "code" among the 8-bit values constituting the "data" are made different. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 24-2 (b), the first bit of each of the "code" and the "data" is used as a flag. That is, in the 8-bit value constituting the "code", the value of the first 1 bit is set to "1", and in the 8-bit value constituting the "data", the value of the first 1 bit is set to "0". .. As a result, the effect control unit 300 can identify whether the data string is "code" or "data" by examining the value of the first 1 bit following the start bit of the received data string. Note that the specific value of the flag is merely an example, and a value different from the value shown above may be used as long as the "code" and the "data" can be distinguished.

Here, since the value of the first bit of the "code" is specified as "1", the range of values that the "code" can take is 128 from 10000000B (= 80H) to 11111111B (= FFH). Is. The letter "B" attached to each value indicates that it is in binary notation, and the letter "H" indicates that it is in hexadecimal notation. Further, since the value of the first bit of "data" is specified as "0", the range of values that "data" can take is 128 from 00000000000B (= 00H) to 01111111B (= 7FH). is there. That is, according to the configurations shown in FIGS. 24-2 (a) and 24-2 (b), 128 types of commands that can take 128 types of values can be set.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, many kinds of effects are executed according to the gaming state, the determination result of the special symbol lottery, and the like. Therefore, a large number of commands for effect control are prepared. In particular, the above 128 "data", which are values indicating the specific contents of the command, may be insufficient. On the other hand, the number of "codes" indicating the types of commands is usually smaller than the above 128. Therefore, it is conceivable to use a part of the bit string of the "code" to describe the value of the "data".

For example, consider the case where the last 1 bit of the "code" is used to describe the value of the "data". Hereinafter, each bit in the 8-bit bit string constituting the "code" and "data" is referred to as a first bit to an eighth bit. In addition, the value of "code" that actually indicates the type of command is called "code value" separately from the bit string that constitutes "code", and the value of the command is actually set separately from the bit string that constitutes "data". The value of the indicated "data" is called a "data value". Then, the code value is described using the 1st to 7th bits of the "code" bit string, and the data value is the entire bit string of the "data" (1st to 8th bits). , Is described using the 8th bit of the "code".

With this configuration, the possible range of the code value is 1000000B (= 40H) to 1111111B (= 7FH) because the value of the first bit is specified as "1" and the size is 7 bits as a whole. ) Up to 64. In addition, the range of data values that can be taken is 128, in which the value of the first bit is represented by 8 bits of "data" specified as "0", and the values of the 8th bit of "code" are "0" and ". In total, there are 256 pieces. Therefore, it is possible to set a command having 256 kinds of values as data values.

The above configuration in the case of describing the data value using a part of the "code" is merely an example, and the specific number of bits and the value are not limited to the above configuration example. For example, the data values may be described using the 7th and 8th bits of the "code". More generally, a predetermined type of data (data value) is used by using a predetermined bit that constitutes the "code" that is the first data part and a bit that constitutes the "data" that is the second data part. Is recorded. Then, data (code value) of another type different from the data (data value) of the predetermined type is recorded by using the remaining bits other than the above-mentioned predetermined bit in the "code" which is the first data unit. To. In other words, the a bit that constitutes the "data" that is the second data part and the b bit that constitutes the "code" that is the first data part (b is smaller than a-1 and is an integer of 1 or more). It is used to record data values of the size of the (a + b) bits.

Further, as a means for increasing the number of data values that can be handled, it is conceivable to increase the bit string of "data" that describes the data values. For example, it is conceivable to prepare "first data" and "second data" as bit strings for describing data values. In this case, if each bit string is 8 bits, the data value can be described by a total of 16 bits. If the second bit of the 8-bit bit string is used as a flag in order to distinguish between the "first data" and the "second data", for example, the first bit and the second bit of the "first data" Can be set to "00B", and the first and second bits of the "second data" can be set to "01B". The first bit has a value of "0" as a flag for identifying the "code". That is, the "data" which is the second data part is every 8 bits (more generally) which is the size of the bit strings ("first data", "second data", ...) Representing individual data values. , For each a bit above), the same value as the value of the first 1 bit is set.

With this configuration, the range of possible values for the "first data" is 64 from 0000000000B (= 00H) to 0111111B (= 3FH), and the range of possible values for the "second data" is Since there are 64 pieces from 01000000B (= 40H) to 01111111B (= 7FH), the total number is 4096 (= 64 × 64). Here, the first bit is used as a flag for distinguishing the "code" and the "data" (the "first data" and the "second data"), and the "first data" and the "second data" are used. Although the second bit is used as the flag for identifying the above, the flag for identifying the four types of bit strings may be set by using the first and second bits. For example, the "code" may have the values of the first and second bits set to "11B", and the "data" may have the values of the first and second bits set to any of "00B", "01B", and "10B". Conceivable.

[Configuration example for command output in RAM of game control unit]
FIG. 24-3 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a command storage area in the RAM 203.
As shown in FIG. 24-3, the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 has a command storage area (storage area) to which individual commands generated by various processes such as the main control process shown in FIG. 8 are assigned. .. In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, 31 command storage areas from the area 01 to the area 031 are set in the RAM 203. Here, the allocation of commands to each command storage area does not necessarily have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, it is possible to assign multiple commands that are not generated at the same time to the same command storage area. In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, a plurality of commands are assigned to the area 01, the area 09, the area 012, the area 019, the area 020, the area 021, the area 022, the area 023, and the area 030, and other commands. One command is assigned to each storage area.

In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, a command related to power-on is assigned to the area 01. The command related to power-on includes a command for controlling power-on when the RAM is cleared and a command for controlling power-on when recovery. Since these commands are generated in different scenes, they are not generated at the same time, and all of them are assigned to the area 01.

Three commands (described as "starting port 1 winning" in the figure) relating to winning a prize in the first starting port 121 are assigned to the areas 02 to 04. One of the commands related to winning the first starting port 121 is a command indicating the result of the determination (look-ahead) in the preliminary determination (see S904 in FIG. 9) based on the winning of the first starting port 121 (in the figure, "Special Figure 1". It is described as "design look-ahead") and is assigned to the area 02. The other one is a command (described as "special figure 1 variation pattern look-ahead" in the figure) indicating the look-ahead (pre-determination) result of the variation pattern specified together with the determination result, and is assigned to the area 03. Yet another is a command indicating that the number of holdings of the special symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the winning of the first starting port 121 ("Special figure 1 holding (+1)" in the figure. ), And it is assigned to the area 04.

Areas 05 to 07 are assigned three commands (described as "starting port 2 winning" in the figure) relating to winning the second starting port 122. One of the commands related to winning a prize in the second starting port 122 is a command indicating the judgment result in the preliminary judgment (see S911 in FIG. 9) based on the winning in the second starting port 122 (in the figure, "special figure 2 symbol look-ahead"). ), And is assigned to the area 05. The other one is a command (described as "special figure 2 fluctuation pattern look-ahead" in the figure) indicating the look-ahead result of the fluctuation pattern specified together with the determination result, and is assigned to the area 06. Yet another is a command indicating that the number of holdings of the special symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value has been increased by 1) based on the winning of the second starting port 122 ("Special figure 2 holding (+1)" in the figure. ), And it is allocated to the area 07.

In areas 08 to 010, there are five commands related to the normal symbol lottery (in the figure, "Public map hold", "Public map type", "Public map confirmation", "Public map open / close", and "Public map hold", respectively. Described) is assigned. Among the commands related to the normal symbol lottery, one of the "normal symbol hold" commands indicates that the number of hold of the normal symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. It is a command (described as "Public figure hold (+1)" in the figure) and is assigned to the area 08. The "normal symbol type" command specifies a normal symbol representing the judgment result in the normal symbol lottery, and indicates that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 223 has started (described as "normal symbol fluctuation start" in the figure). And is allocated to area 09. The "normal symbol confirmation" command is a command indicating that the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol representing the judgment result of the normal symbol lottery is confirmed (in the figure, "normal symbol confirmation"). Described), and is allocated to the area 09. The "open / closed principle" command is a command (indicated as "open / closed" in the figure) indicating that the electric tulip 123, which is an ordinary electric accessory, is operated (auxiliary game) based on the judgment result of the ordinary symbol lottery. Yes, it is allocated to area 09. The other one of the "Public figure hold" commands is a command indicating that the number of holds has been updated (here, the value has been reduced by 1) due to the processing of the normal symbol lottery (in the figure, "Public figure hold (-)". 1) ”) and is allocated to area 010.

Here, in the process of the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the stop display of the normal symbol, and the operation of the electric tulip 123 by the auxiliary game are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Then, the variation display of the normal symbol based on the fact that another game ball has passed through the gate 124 is not started while the electric tulip 123 is operating (see FIG. 16). Therefore, none of the above-mentioned three types of commands, "Public map type", "Public map confirmation", and "Public map opening / closing", are generated at the same time. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 24-3, these three types of commands are assigned to the same command storage area (area 09).

Nine commands related to the special symbol lottery (indicated as "special figure fluctuation" and "special figure special electric power" in the figure) are assigned to the areas 011 to 014. Among the commands related to the special symbol lottery, one of the "special symbol fluctuation" commands is a command indicating the current gaming state (high probability state or low probability state, time saving state or time saving no state) of the pachinko gaming machine 100 ( In the figure, it is described as "gaming state") and is assigned to the area 011. The other one of the "special symbol fluctuation" commands is to specify a special symbol representing the judgment result of the special symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery, and to display the fluctuation of the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. Is a command (described as "special figure designation" in the figure) indicating that the above is started, and is assigned to the area 012. Yet another one of the "special symbol variation" commands is a command for specifying the variation pattern of the special symbol variation performed in the special symbol lottery (described as "variation pattern" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 013. Yet another command of the "special figure change" command is a command indicating that the number of holds has been updated (here, the value has been reduced by 1) due to the processing of the special symbol lottery (in the figure, "special figure hold (in the figure)". -1) ”), and it is assigned to the area 014.

On the other hand, one of the "special figure special train" commands is a command indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state (described as "customer waiting" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 012. The other one of the "special electric train" commands is a command (in the figure, "special electric power") indicating that the special electric accessory, the large winning opening 125, is operated (special game, big hit game) based on the judgment result of the special symbol lottery. It is described as "open") and is allocated to the area 012. Yet another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (described as "big hit OP" in the figure) indicating that the opening operation of the jackpot game has started, and is assigned to the area 012. Yet another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (described as "big hit ED" in the figure) indicating that the ending operation of the jackpot game has started, and is assigned to the area 012. Yet another one of the "special symbol special electric" commands is that the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are stopped and displayed, and the special symbol representing the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is confirmed. It is a command (described as "special figure confirmation" in the figure) and is assigned to the area 012.

Here, in the process of the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbol, the stop display of the special symbol, and the operation of the large winning opening 125 by the special game are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Then, during the execution of the special game, the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of another game ball is not started (see FIG. 11). Further, in the jackpot game, the opening operation, the operation of the big winning opening 125, and the ending operation are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Therefore, neither the "special figure designation" command nor the five types of "special figure special electric" commands in the above "special figure variation" command are generated at the same time. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 24-3, these six types of commands are assigned to the same command storage area (area 012).

Four commands related to switch detection (denoted as "switch pass" in the figure) are assigned to regions 015 to 018. One of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the gate 124L on the left side of the game area 111 (described as “passing through the left gate” in the figure), and is assigned to the area 015. Another command related to switch detection is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the gate 124R on the right side of the game area 111 (described as "passing through the right gate" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 016. .. Yet another command related to switch detection is a command indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 122 (described as "passing through the starting port SW2 (electric chew)" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 017. Has been done. Yet another command related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the grand prize opening 125 (described as "large winning opening winning" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 018.

Commands related to errors (denoted as "error" in the figure) are assigned to areas 019 to 030. The errors detected by the game control unit 200 of the pachinko game machine 100 include, for example, a full tank error indicating that the payout ball is full in the plate 153 (see FIGS. 1 and 2), and the front surface of the game frame 150. Door opening error indicating that the frame is open, payout error indicating that the payout unit cannot pay out the game ball, various detection switches such as gate switch 214 and start port switches 211 and 212 have not been released yet. There is a switch unconnected error indicating that the connection is established. In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, these errors are assigned to regions 019 to 023, respectively. For each error, there is a command indicating that each error has occurred (described as "~ error start" in the figure) and a command indicating that each error has been resolved (described as "~ error end" in the figure). , Are assigned to the same command storage area.

In addition, various control items and error items are set according to the specifications and functions of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and commands according to the control items, commands indicating that an error has occurred, and errors have been resolved depending on the type of error. It may be configured to generate a command or the like indicating that. Then, these commands can be appropriately assigned to the command storage area. In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, commands related to various errors are individually assigned to areas 024 to 030. Further, a command for detecting and notifying a specific winning prize (described as "winning notification designation" in the figure) is assigned to the area 031.

As described above, in the command storage area provided in the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200, one type or a plurality of types of commands are associated with one command storage area. Then, in the main control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control unit 200 stores the generated command in the command storage area associated with the command.
Here, in the main control process, not all commands are always generated every time one cycle of the process is executed. For example, when there is no prize in the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the command related to the prize in the start ports 121 and 122 and the "special figure variation" command are not generated. In addition, among the commands related to the normal symbol lottery, the "normal figure open / close" command and the "special figure special electric" command are not generated unless it is the timing when these electric accessories should be operated. In addition, the command related to the occurrence of an error is not generated unless an error has occurred in the first place.
Therefore, when the output process of the main control process (see S806 in FIG. 8) is performed, the command is usually stored in some command storage areas among the command storage areas provided in the RAM 203. The command is not stored in the other command storage area.

[Command output operation]
FIG. 24-4 is a flowchart showing the contents of output processing by the output control unit 240.
In the present embodiment, the output control unit 240 pays attention to the command storage area of the RAM 203 shown in FIG. 24-3 in order from the top (in order of the area number), and outputs the commands stored in each command storage area. ..

As shown in FIG. 24-4, the output control unit 240 of the game control unit 200 first has a command storage area at the head of the command storage areas provided in the RAM 203 (area 01 in the example shown in FIG. (S2411), and check whether or not the command is stored (S2412). Then, if the command is stored (Yes in S2412), the output control unit 240 reads the stored command and outputs it to the effect control unit 300 (S2413).

When the command is not stored in the command storage area (initially the area 01) of interest (No in S2412), or after outputting the command stored in the command storage area in S2413, the output control unit 240 , Checks if there is a command storage area with the next area number (S2414). When there is the next command storage area (Yes in S2414), the output control unit 240 pays attention to the command storage area (S2415), returns to S2412, confirms the presence or absence of the command (S2412), and outputs (S2413). repeat. Then, if processing is performed on the last command storage area (area 031 in the example shown in FIG. 24-3), the output processing is terminated because there is no command storage area with the next area number (No in S2414). To do.

[Set command output order]
In the main control process, when a command is generated in each process described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19, the generated command is usually stored in the corresponding command storage area of the RAM 203. That is, the commands are generally stored in the command storage area in the order in which the commands are generated.
On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 24-4, in the output processing by the output control unit 240, each command storage area is focused and stored in a certain order (in the above example, in the order of the area number). Output the command. That is, the commands are output in a predetermined specific order regardless of the order in which the commands are generated. This is because it may be desirable that specific commands are transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in a specific order in order to prevent confusion in the effect control of the effect control unit 300 based on commands. That is, since the effect control unit 300 executes the effect control based on the command in the order of receiving from the game control unit 200, confusion such as a contradiction may occur in the effect control due to the difference in the order of receiving the commands. , This needs to be prevented.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the operation of the effect control unit 300.
The operation of the effect control unit 300 includes the main process shown in FIG. 25 (a) and the interrupt process shown in FIG. 25 (b). Referring to FIG. 25 (a), the effect control unit 300 first makes initial settings at startup (S2501), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) (S2502), and then follows the set cycle. , While updating the random number used in the effect control (S2503), the interrupt process is accepted.

The interrupt processing is periodically performed according to the cycle set in S2502. Referring to FIG. 25B, in this interrupt process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs a command reception process (S2511). In this command reception process, the effect content (effect pattern) is selected. In addition, the effect control unit 300 performs an effect button process for accepting an operation of the effect button 161B or the like by the player (S2512). After that, the effect control unit 300 performs a command transmission process of transmitting a command including information of the selected effect pattern to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S2513). As a result, the image display and sound output to the image display unit 114, the operation of the movable accessory 115, the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like are performed.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S2511 in FIG. 25B).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (S2601). The pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command are set in the start port switch process shown in FIG. 9 in the game control unit 200 (S906, S907, S913, S914), and the output process (S806) shown in FIG. ) Is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300.
Then, when the effect control unit 300 determines that the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (Yes in S2601), the value of the hold number held in the RAM 303 is added by 1 (S2602). Further, the effect control unit 300 performs the pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2603). The content of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not the pre-determination result command or the hold number increase command (No in S2601), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is the fluctuation start command (S2604). This variation start command is a command set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1111) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is a fluctuation start command (Yes in S2604), the effect control unit 300 executes the effect selection process (S2605). Further, when the fluctuation start command is received, a random value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S2503 of the main process shown in FIG. 25 (a). The details of the effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S2601 and S2604), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S2606). This fluctuation stop command is a command set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1114) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is a variable stop command (Yes in S2606), the effect control unit 300 executes the process during the end of the variable effect (S2607). In the process during the end of the variation effect, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the received variation stop command and sets the variation effect end command for instructing the end of the effect of the symbol variation in the RAM 303.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S2601, S2604, and S2606), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game with the received command. It is determined whether or not the command is an opening command for the command (S2608). This opening command is a command that is set in the stopped processing shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2608), the effect control unit 300 executes the jackpot effect selection process (S2609). The details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, and S2608), the effect control unit 300 receives a jackpot game. It is determined whether or not the ending command is for starting the ending operation of (S2610). This ending command is a command set in the large winning opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an ending command (Yes in S2610), the effect control unit 300 executes the ending effect selection process (S2611). The details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, and an ending command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, S2608, and S2610), then the effect control unit 300 , The customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S2612). The details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S2603) and the effect selection process (S2605) of FIG. 26.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Further, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the hold number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects an effect pattern (pre-determination effect pattern) used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-judgment effect pattern, various effect patterns can be provided to foretell the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, an effect such as a hold display effect or a continuous advance notice effect can be provided as a pre-determination effect pattern. In the present embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218 and the second special symbol hold indicator 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, the image display unit 114 is displayed on hold to indicate the occurrence of hold and the number of holds (hold display effect). Therefore, in this hold display effect, by reflecting the pre-judgment result in the display mode of the hold display, etc., the player is notified of the judgment result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing for the hold ball. It can be a suggestive pre-judgment effect.

Although the case where the hold display effect is used as the pre-judgment effect has been described here, various advance notice effects can be produced by reflecting it in various effects performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. Will be able to do. For example, an effect using an effect image displayed on the image display unit 114, an effect by emitting light from a board lamp 116 or a frame lamp 157, an effect by an operation of a movable accessory, an effect by acoustic output such as music or sound effects, etc. are performed in advance. It can be set as a judgment effect pattern.

Further, the pre-determination effect is executed in accordance with the symbol change for other winning balls performed before the symbol change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination is performed. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is four per one starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 9). In addition, priority shall be given to the digestion of the reserved ball at the second starting port 122. In this case, for example, if a preliminary determination is made for a reserved ball having the second starting port 122, the fluctuation currently being changed (referred to as the fluctuation) is included before the symbol change for the reserved ball is performed. The symbols of up to four winning balls will be changed. In the advance notice effect related to the reserved ball for which the pre-judgment has been made, if the symbol change is performed a plurality of times before the symbol change is performed for the reserved ball, the advance notice effect (continuous notice effect) that spans the multiple symbol changes. ) May be performed.

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets the hold number command including the value of the hold number after addition and the information of the pre-determination effect pattern selected in the pre-determination effect selection process in the RAM 303 (S2804). The hold number command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the image / sound control unit 310 of the selected pre-determination effect pattern. By receiving the hold number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for drawing and outputting the image or sound corresponding to the selected pre-determination effect pattern on the VDP 314. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data or acoustic data for representing the selected pre-determination effect pattern from the CGROM 315 or SNDROM 316, and expresses the pre-determination effect using the image display unit 114 or the speaker 156. ..

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S2811). Further, the value of the number of holdings held in the RAM 303 is subtracted by 1 (S2812). Then, the effect control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. A variation effect pattern of symbol variation due to an image is selected (S2813).

Finally, the effect control unit 300 sets a variable effect start command in the RAM 303 to instruct the execution start of the selected effect (S2814). The variation effect start command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variation effect pattern. By receiving the variation effect start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for drawing and outputting the image or sound corresponding to the selected variation effect pattern on the VDP 314. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data or acoustic data for representing the selected variation effect pattern from the CGROM 315 or SNDROM 316, and expresses the variation effect using the image display unit 114 or the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the selection process of the variation effect pattern of the symbol variation in S2813, the variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variation effect pattern determined here, the variation display of the decorative pattern, the background effect, the notice effect, and the like are determined. The decorative symbol variation display is an effect display performed by the image display unit 114 in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol performed by the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. A reach effect or the like is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns are set for the variation pattern, it is one of the effect random numbers (one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25A). , The effect random number value is acquired when the variation start command is received), and the variation effect pattern may be selected by lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S2609) of FIG. 26.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3001), and selects an effect pattern (big hit effect pattern) (S3002). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and acoustic data used for the effect according to the selected jackpot effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the jackpot effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and sets the RAM 303. The jackpot effect selection process ends (S3003). As a result, the production during the big hit is determined. In the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3002), a determination may be made based on a random number value acquired when a command is received.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S2611) of FIG. 26.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3101), and selects an effect pattern (ending effect pattern) (S3102). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and acoustic data used for the effect according to the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and sets the RAM 303. The ending effect selection process ends (S3103). In the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), a determination may be made based on a random number value acquired when the command is received.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S2612) of FIG.
The effect control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for shifting to the customer waiting state has been received (S3201). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S3201), the effect control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S3202) and turns on the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S3203). On the other hand, when the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S3201), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is ON (S3204). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S3204), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated.

When the measurement flag is ON (after Yes in S3204 or ON in S3203), the effect control unit 300 then determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). Is determined (S3205). If the time is not up (No in S3205), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in S3205), the effect control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S3206), and issues a customer wait effect command for performing the customer wait effect (demo effect) to the RAM 303. Is set to and the customer waiting command reception process is terminated (S3207).

When the command reception process is completed as described above, any one of the variable effect start command, the variable effect end command, the jackpot effect start command, the ending effect start command, and the customer waiting effect command is set in the RAM 303.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button processing (S2512 in FIG. 25B).
In this effect button processing, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the operation means such as the effect button 161B by the player has been operated during the predetermined reception period (valid period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes pressing the effect button 161B to turn it on, and pressing the center key and surrounding keys of the effect key 162 to turn it ON. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an operation device other than the effect button 161B and the effect key 162, such as a touch panel, the operation of the device is detected. The effect control unit 300 receives an operation signal from the controller of these devices and detects that the operation has been performed.

If an operating means such as the effect button 161B is operated (Yes in S3301), the effect control unit 300 sets an effect button command including information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303 and ends the effect button process. (S3302).

After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2513) of FIG. 25 (b), and issues the command set in the RAM 303 by the above command reception process and effect button process to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp. It is transmitted to the control unit 320. Then, based on the received command, the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display an image on the image display unit 114, sound output, operate the movable accessory 115, emit light from the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like. To execute the set effect.

(Direction operation device)
Next, the configuration of the effect operation device will be described.
FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation device 161 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 32 (A), the game frame 150 includes an effect operation device 161 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation device 161 is provided on the lower side of the game frame 150 and in the vicinity of the upper plate 153. Further, the effect operation device 161 is provided with the effect button 161B (see FIG. 2B) described above.
In the following, the front side of the game frame 150 shown in FIG. 32 (A) will be referred to as the “front side”, the back side of the paper surface will be referred to as the “rear side”, and these directions will be referred to as “front-back direction”. Further, the right side of the game frame 150 shown in FIG. 32 (A) is referred to as the “right side”, the left side of the paper surface is referred to as the “left side”, and these directions are referred to as “left-right directions”. Further, the upper side of the game frame 150 shown in FIG. 32A is referred to as "upper side", the lower side of the paper surface is referred to as "lower side", and these directions are referred to as "vertical direction".
Further, the front side of the game frame 150 is the player side on which the player faces. The above-mentioned directional relationship corresponds to the directional relationship seen by the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 100.

The effect operation device 161 of the present embodiment is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction according to the progress of the game. More specifically, the effect operation device 161 is provided so as to be movable upward from the position shown in FIG. 32 (A) as shown in FIG. 32 (B), and is shown in FIG. 32 (B). It is provided so that it can be moved downward from the position. In the following, the state of the effect operating device 161 shown in FIG. 32 (A), that is, the state in which the effect operating device 161 has not moved upward is referred to as a “non-protruding state”. Further, the state of the effect operating device 161 shown in FIG. 32 (B), that is, the state in which the effect operating device 161 is moved upward is referred to as a “protruding state”.

As shown in FIG. 32 (B), the effect operating device 161 is provided with an effect lever 161L that can be operated by the player. The player can perform an operation of grasping the effect lever 161L and pulling it forward.
When the effect operating device 161 is in the protruding state, the player can operate the effect lever 161L. On the other hand, when the effect operating device 161 is in the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32 (A)), the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L. On the other hand, the effect button 161B is provided at the upper part of the effect operation device 161, and the player can press the effect button 161B regardless of whether the effect operation device 161 is in the non-protruding state or the protruding state. Can be operated.

FIG. 33 is a partial plan view of the game frame 150.
As shown in FIG. 33, the game frame 150 includes an effect key 162 (see FIG. 2B), a ball lending button 163, a return button 164, a ball removal button 165, a light amount adjusting unit 166, and a volume adjustment. It is provided with a unit 167. Further, a caution sticker 41 for calling attention to the player is attached to the game frame 150. The ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjusting unit 166, the volume adjusting unit 167, and the caution sticker 41 are all on the lower side of the game frame 150, and are on the lower side of the game frame 150, and the effect operating device 161. It is provided in the vicinity.

The effect key 162 includes a rear button 162a located on the rear side of the effect key 162, a front button 162b located on the front side of the effect key 162, a right button 162c located on the right side of the effect key 162, and the effect key 162. A left button 162d located on the left side is provided.

The ball lending button 163 is a button for lending a game ball. When the player presses the ball lending button 163, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is subtracted to lend the game ball.
The return button 164 is a button for returning a storage medium such as a card that stores the balance. When the player presses the return button 164, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine.
The ball removal button 165 is a button for moving the game balls stored in the upper plate 153 to the lower plate. When the player presses the ball removal button 165, the game balls accumulated in the upper plate 153 fall to the lower plate through a passage (not shown) connecting the upper plate 153 and the lower plate.

The light amount adjusting unit 166 is an operation unit for adjusting the light amount of various lamps. The light amount adjusting unit 166 is provided with an increase button 166a for increasing the light amount and a decrease button 166b for decreasing the light amount. When the player presses the increase button 166a of the light amount adjusting unit 166, the effect control unit 300 increases the light amount of various lamps. Further, when the player presses the reduction button 166b of the light amount adjusting unit 166, the effect control unit 300 reduces the light amount of various lamps.
The volume adjusting unit 167 is an operation unit for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156. The volume adjusting unit 167 is provided with an increase button 167a for increasing the volume and a decrease button 167b for decreasing the volume. When the player presses the increase button 167a of the volume adjustment unit 167, the effect control unit 300 increases the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156. Further, when the player presses the decrease button 167b of the volume adjustment unit 167, the effect control unit 300 reduces the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156.

Each of the effect button 161B, the effect lever 161L, the effect key 162, the light amount adjusting unit 166, and the volume adjusting unit 167 described above is an example of an input device for the player to input the effect. When the various input devices are operated, the effect control unit 300 receives an operation signal indicating that the input device has been operated and detects that the input device has been operated.

The effect operation device 161 of the present embodiment is provided at the center of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (see FIG. 1) in the left-right direction. Further, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment unit 166, the volume adjustment unit 167, and the warning sticker 41 are all provided on the right side of the effect operation device 161. ing. That is, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjusting unit 166, the volume adjusting unit 167, and the warning sticker 41 are all provided on the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 100. There is.
Further, the caution sticker 41 of the present embodiment is provided in the vicinity of the effect operation device 161, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjusting unit 166, and the volume adjusting unit 167. ing.

(Caution sticker)
Next, the caution sticker 41 will be described.
FIG. 34 (A) is a view showing the front surface side of the caution sticker 41, and FIG. 34 (B) is a view showing the back surface side of the caution sticker 41.
The caution sticker 41 shown in FIG. 34 (A) includes an operation caution unit 410 that calls attention to the operation of the effect lever 161L, a lever caution unit 411 that calls attention to the existence of the effect lever 161L, and an upper part. An accessory alerting unit 412 is provided to alert attention to the existence of the object 5. In addition, the attention-calling sticker 41 shows a caution-calling illustration section 413 showing a picture calling attention, a general warning mark section 414 showing a mark calling attention, and characters calling attention. A caution character unit 419 is provided.

Information for calling attention when the player operates the effect lever 161L is displayed on the operation caution unit 410. More specifically, the operation warning unit 410 is used to warn the player that the player unintentionally touches a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when operating the effect lever 161L. Information is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Caution for pinching a hand by operating the effect lever" is displayed on the operation alerting unit 410.
When the effect operating device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32 (A)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32 (B)), the player unintentionally causes the lever attention alerting unit 411 to display the effect lever 161L. Information is displayed to alert you to contacting. In the illustrated example, the text "Caution for popping out of the effect lever" is displayed on the lever attention alerting unit 411.
Information for alerting the player to unintentionally contact the upper accessory 5 when the upper accessory 5 moves upward is displayed on the accessory alert unit 412. In the illustrated example, the text "Caution for popping out the accessory at the upper part of the frame" is displayed on the accessory attention alerting unit 412.

The attention-calling illustration unit 413 displays a target illustration unit 413L in which the object of attention is shown by a picture, and an impact illustration unit 413I for making the player image the impact.
In the target illustration unit 413L, a picture imitating the effect lever 161L, which is the object of attention, is shown. More specifically, the target illustration unit 413L shows a picture having a structure similar to that of the effect lever 161L but not the same.
The impact illustration unit 413I is provided adjacent to the target illustration unit 413L. In this case, the player who sees the attention-calling illustration unit 413 can be made to recognize that the target of attention in the caution-calling sticker 41 is the effect lever 161L. Further, it is possible to make the player imagine that the player may hit the effect lever 161L or the structure near the effect lever 161L.

The mark provided on the general warning mark unit 414 has a display mode defined by the ISO standard and the JIS standard. More specifically, the mark provided on the general warning mark unit 414 is a mark defined by ISO3864 and JIS9101 as a form of a safety sign to warn the user. The mark shown in the general warning mark section 414 is hereinafter referred to as a general warning mark. The general warning mark is used together with texts, illustrations, etc. to indicate that danger is lurking, and calls attention to the user.
The general warning mark portion 414 has an exclamation mark 415, an outer line 416 having a triangular shape and surrounding the exclamation mark 415, a background portion 417 located between the exclamation mark 415 and the outer line 416, and a triangular shape. An outline 418 surrounding the outline 416 is provided.

The exclamation mark 415 is provided in the central portion of the general warning mark portion 414. In the illustrated example, the exclamation mark 415 is shown in black.
The outline 416 is shown in black.
The background portion 417 is shown in yellow.
Outline 418 is shown in yellow.
In this way, the display colors of the general warning mark portion 414 are black, yellow, black, and yellow in the order from the central portion to the outside, that is, in the order of the exclamation mark 415, the background portion 417, the outline 416, and the outline 418. It has become. In this case, the difference in brightness between the adjacent yellow and black in the general warning mark portion 414 is conspicuous, and the presence of the general warning mark portion 414 can be easily noticed by the player. Therefore, the game in which the caution sticker 41 is viewed. It makes it easier for people to recognize the danger.

The caution character unit 419 is provided next to the general warning mark unit 414, and together with the general warning mark unit 414, alerts the player. In the illustrated example, the text "Caution" is shown in the alert character section 419.

Further, the caution sticker 41 is formed with a notched portion 41N in which one of the four corners of the rectangle is notched. As a result, the length L1 of the first side of the left end portion of the caution sticker 41 is longer than the length L2 of the second side of the right end portion. Further, in the caution sticker 41, the length L3 of the third side of the upper end portion is longer than the length L4 of the fourth side of the lower end portion.

As described above, the caution sticker 41 is provided with an operation warning unit 410 and a caution illustration unit 413. In this case, it is possible to make the player who sees the operation caution unit 410 and the caution illustration unit 413 imagine that the player may pinch his / her hand in the effect lever 161L when operating the effect lever 161L.
Further, the attention-calling sticker 41 is provided with a lever warning-calling unit 411 and a warning-calling illustration unit 413. In this case, the player who sees the lever attention alerting unit 411 and the attention alerting illustration unit 413 imagines that the player may hit the effect lever 161L when the effect operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state to the projecting state. Can be made to.

Further, as described above, the caution sticker 41 is located near the effect button 161B, the effect lever 161L, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjusting unit 166, and the volume adjusting unit 167. It is provided in.
The effect button 161B, the effect lever 161L, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjusting unit 166, and the volume adjusting unit 167 are operating means that can be operated by the player, respectively. .. Near the area where these operating means are provided, it is easy for the player to enter the player's field of view when operating each operating means. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the caution sticker 41 in the area where the player can easily enter the field of view of the player when operating each operating means, the player is alerted when operating each operating means. It makes it easier for the player to notice the existence of the sticker 41.

Further, the caution sticker 41 is provided with an accessory caution unit 412. That is, the caution sticker 41 of the present embodiment not only calls attention to the effect lever 161L, but also calls attention to the upper accessory 5. In other words, the alert sticker 41 contains information for alerting each of the plurality of objects of attention. In this case, as compared with the case where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with the caution sticker 41 for each object of attention, the object of attention to the player is suppressed while suppressing the design of the pachinko gaming machine 100 from being impaired. It is possible to call attention to each.

Further, the attention-calling sticker 41 calls attention to the effect lever 161L without calling attention to the effect button 161B of the effect operation device 161. In this case, even when the effect button 161B and the effect lever 161L are integrally provided on the effect operation device 161, the player who sees the caution sticker 41 is notified of the attention target portion of the effect operation device 161. It becomes easier to recognize.

The configuration of the alert sticker 41 is not limited to the above example. For example, the caution sticker 41 may not be provided with the caution illustration unit 413. In this case, the background color of the caution sticker 41 may be black. In other words, the color of the part of the caution sticker 41 that is not provided with the operation caution part 410, the lever caution part 411, the accessory caution part 412, the general warning mark part 414, and the caution character part 419. May be black. Further, the texts shown in the operation alerting unit 410, the lever alerting unit 411, the accessory attention alerting unit 412, and the alerting character unit 419 may be white. In this case, only the general warning mark portion 414 of the warning sticker 41 has a yellow portion, and the other portion different from the general warning mark portion 414 is white or black. Therefore, the general warning mark portion 414 becomes more conspicuous than the case where the background of the warning sticker 41 and the text shown on the warning sticker 41 are yellow, and a general warning is given to the player who sees the warning sticker 41. It becomes easy to notice the existence of the mark portion 414.

Next, the back side of the caution sticker 41 will be described.
One side of the back surface of the caution sticker 41 is an adhesive surface (adhesive surface) for adhering to the game frame 150. Then, the entire back surface of the caution sticker 41 is attached to the game frame 150. That is, the caution sticker 41 is attached to the game frame 150 without the adhesive surfaces being attached to each other.
When the worker who attaches the warning sticker 41 to the pachinko gaming machine 100 sees the warning sticker 41 from the back side, the yellow background portion 417 and the yellow outline 418 are transparent as shown in FIG. 34 (B). Looks like a worker. Further, although the colors of the exclamation mark 415 and the outline 416 cannot be seen through by the operator, the exclamation mark 415 is surrounded by the background portion 417, and the outline 416 is sandwiched between the background portion 417 and the outline 418. , Exclamation mark 415 and outline 416 silhouettes are visible to the operator. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the operator who sees the warning sticker 41 from the back side to notice that the general warning mark portion 414 is displayed on the warning sticker 41. In this case, it becomes easier for the operator to recognize that the caution sticker 41 is a sticker to be attached to the pachinko gaming machine 100 for alerting, and the operator forgets to attach the alerting sticker 41 to the pachinko gaming machine 100. Can be suppressed.

The color of the exclamation mark 415 and the color of the outline 416 so that the worker can see through the color of the exclamation mark 415 and the color of the outline 416 when the operator sees the caution sticker 41 from the back side. May be applied. That is, when the worker sees the caution sticker 41 from the back side, at least the color of the yellowed portion of the warning sticker 41 may be transparent to the worker.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of a portion of the game frame 150 to which the caution sticker 41 is attached and a portion in the vicinity thereof.
As shown in FIG. 35 (A-1), the game frame 150 is provided with a sticker portion 168 to which the caution sticker 41 is attached. The attached portion 168 is made of a material that does not transmit light. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display content of the caution sticker 41 due to the light of various lamps passing through the affixed portion 168 and the caution sticker 41 and entering the player's eyes.

Further, the game frame 150 is provided with a recess 169 having a recess. The recess 169 has the same shape as the outer shape of the warning sticker 41, and is provided slightly wider than the warning sticker 41. The attachment portion 168 is provided on the bottom surface of the recess 169.
When the operator attaches the caution sticker 41 so that the caution sticker 41 fits on the bottom surface of the recess 169, the caution sticker 41 is attached to the attached portion 168 as shown in FIG. 35 (A-2). Will be done. As described above, according to the configuration in which the caution sticker 41 is attached to the bottom surface of the recess 169, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to position the caution sticker 41 with respect to the game frame 150. In addition, the caution sticker 41 attached to the attached portion 168 becomes difficult to be peeled off.

The configuration in the vicinity of the attached portion 168 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 35 (A-1).
As shown in FIG. 35 (B-1), the game frame 150 may be provided with the protruding first convex portion 170 and the second convex portion 171 instead of the concave portion 169. Both the first convex portion 170 and the second convex portion 171 are formed in an L shape. Further, the first convex portion 170 is provided so as to surround the left end portion and the front side end portion of the attachment portion 168. Further, the second convex portion 171 is provided so as to surround the right end portion and the rear side end portion of the attachment portion 168.
When the operator attaches the warning sticker 41 so that the warning sticker 41 fits between the first convex portion 170 and the second convex portion 171, the warning sticker 41 is shown in FIG. 35 (B-2). As shown, it is attached to the attached portion 168. As described above, even if the caution sticker 41 is attached between the first convex portion 170 and the second convex portion 171, it is easy for the operator to position the caution sticker 41 with respect to the game frame 150. Can be made to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (C-1), the game frame 150 may be provided with a protruding third convex portion 172. The third convex portion 172 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the attachment portion 168.
When the operator attaches the warning sticker 41 so that the warning sticker 41 fits in the area surrounded by the third convex portion 172, the warning sticker 41 becomes as shown in FIG. 35 (C-2). It is attached to the attached portion 168. In this way, even if the caution sticker 41 is attached to the area surrounded by the third convex portion 172, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to position the warning sticker 41 with respect to the game frame 150. .. In addition, the caution sticker 41 attached to the attached portion 168 becomes difficult to be peeled off.

In particular, according to the configuration of the concave portion 169 shown in FIG. 35 (A-1) and the configuration of the third convex portion 172 shown in FIG. 35 (C-1), the caution sticker 41 is a region where the unevenness is provided. It is attached so that it fits inside the. Further, as described above, in the caution sticker 41, the length L1 of the first side (see FIG. 34 (A)) is longer than the length L2 of the second side, and the length L3 of the third side Is longer than the length L4 of the fourth side. In this case, for example, when the operator tries to attach the warning sticker 41 in a state where the top, bottom, left, and right of the warning sticker 41 are reversed, the warning sticker 41 does not fit inside the uneven area. The caution sticker 41 cannot be attached. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the caution sticker 41 from being affixed to the area deviated from the affixed portion 168.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example in which an operator attaches a caution sticker 41 to a game frame 150 using a jig.
As shown in FIG. 36 (A), the caution sticker 41 may be attached to the attached portion 168 provided on a flat surface having no unevenness around it. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the operator may attach the caution sticker 41 using the jig J.

The jig J has a first fixing portion J1 and a second fixing portion J2 for fixing the jig J to the game frame 150, and a plane having a plane and movable with respect to the first fixing portion J1 and the second fixing portion J2. It is provided with a part J3. Further, the flat surface portion J3 is formed with an opening J4 having an opening in the shape of a warning sticker 41.
When the operator uses the jig J to attach the caution sticker 41 to the attachment portion 168, the first fixing portion J1 is fixed to the right end portion of the game frame 150, and the second fixing portion J2 is used for the game. It is fixed to the front end of the frame 150. Then, in a state where the flat surface portion J3 is positioned so that the opening portion J4 overlaps the attachment portion 168, the operator attaches the caution sticker 41 to the game frame 150 through the opening portion J4, whereby FIG. 36 (C) As shown in the above, a caution sticker 41 is attached to the attached portion 168. Even in this case, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to position the caution sticker 41 with respect to the game frame 150.

Next, the positional relationship between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 and the caution sticker 41 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 and the caution sticker 41.

As shown in FIG. 37 (A), the caution sticker 41 is located on the right side of the effect lever 161L and on the left side of the handle 151. That is, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided at a position between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, even when the player operates the steering wheel 151 with the right hand and the effect lever 161L with the left hand, for example, the player's body is between the player's eyes and the caution sticker 41. It becomes difficult to enter, and the caution sticker 41 easily enters the player's field of vision. Therefore, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L while operating the handle 151, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the caution sticker 41, and the caution sticker for the player. It is possible to call attention by 41.

Here, "between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151" includes between the left end 161LL of the effect lever 161L and the right end 151R of the handle 151. That is, "between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151" includes between the tip of the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 on one side and the tip on the other side in the left-right direction. In the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided at a position between the central portion 161LC of the effect lever 161L in the left-right direction and the central portion 151C of the handle 151 in the left-right direction.

Further, the position where the caution sticker 41 is attached is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 37 (A).
For example, the caution sticker 41 may be provided so as to be located between the right end end 161LR of the effect lever 161L and the left end end 151L of the handle 151.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), a part 41P of the caution sticker 41 may be provided between the left tip 161LL of the effect lever 161L and the right tip 151R of the handle 151. .. That is, in order to "provide the caution sticker 41 at a position between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151", a part 41P of the caution seal 41 is located between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151, and caution It is also included that the other part of the arousal sticker 41 is provided so as not to be located between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151. Even in this case, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L to operate the effect lever 161L while operating the handle 151, a part 41P of the caution sticker 41 is easily in the player's field of view. .. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to notice the existence of the caution sticker 41, and the player can be alerted by the caution sticker 41.
Further, the caution sticker 41 may be provided at a position higher than the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 as long as it is between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction.

Further, the two operating means provided on both outer sides of the caution sticker 41 in the left-right direction are not limited to the effect lever 161L and the handle 151. For example, in the left-right direction, a warning sticker 41 is placed between each of the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment unit 166, and the volume adjustment unit 167, and the effect lever 161L. May be provided. Further, an eject button 155 (see FIG. 1) may be provided on the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and a caution sticker 41 may be provided between the eject button 155 and the effect lever 161L in the left-right direction.

Here, the effect lever 161L is regarded as a first operating means that can be operated by the player. Further, each of the handle 151, the eject button 155, the effect button 161B, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjusting unit 166, and the volume adjusting unit 167 can be operated by the player. However, it can be regarded as a second operating means different from the first operating means. Further, when the effect lever 161L is regarded as the first operation means and the effect button 161B is regarded as the second operation means, the handle 151, the take-out button 155, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, and the ball removal button Each of the 165, the light amount adjusting unit 166, and the volume adjusting unit 167 is regarded as a third operating means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means and the second operating means.
Further, the alert sticker 41 is regarded as an alert means for alerting the player.

(Modified example of alerting means)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a means for calling attention of a modified example.
In the present embodiment, it has been described that the player is alerted by the alert sticker 41, which is an example of the alerting means. Here, the alerting means is not limited to the alerting sticker 41.

Instead of the alert sticker 41, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), the alert portion 42 may be provided in the game frame 150. The caution unit 42 is provided by printing on the game frame 150. As described above, the alerting means does not have to be a sticker.

The attention alerting unit 42 is provided in the vicinity of each of the effect lever 161L, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjusting unit 166, and the volume adjusting unit 167. The attention-calling section 42 includes a lever warning section 421 that calls attention to the operation of the effect lever 161L, a damage warning section 422 that calls attention to the damage of the effect lever 161L, and a general warning with a general warning mark. A mark portion 423 is provided. Further, the attention alerting portion 42 is provided with a laminating portion 427 laminated on one surface of the alerting portion 42.

The lever attention alerting unit 421 displays information for alerting the player when operating the effect lever 161L. In the illustrated example, the text "Caution for operating the effect lever" is displayed on the lever attention alerting unit 421.
Information for alerting that the effect lever 161L is damaged is displayed on the damage warning unit 422. More specifically, the damage warning unit 422 is used to warn that the effect lever 161L may be damaged when the player operates the effect lever 161L without paying attention to it. Information is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "There is a risk of damage if operated violently" is displayed on the damage warning unit 422. In this case, if the player who sees the lever warning unit 421 and the damage warning unit 422 operates the effect lever 161L without paying attention to the effect lever 161L, the effect lever 161L may be damaged. You can imagine something.

The general warning mark portion 423 is provided with an exclamation mark 424, an outer line 425 having a triangular shape and surrounding the exclamation mark 424, and a background portion 426 located between the exclamation mark 424 and the outer line 425. .. As described above, the general warning mark provided in the alert means does not have to be provided with an outline surrounding the outline 425.

The exclamation mark 424 is shown in black at the center of the general warning mark 423.
The outline 425 is shown in black.
The background portion 426 is shown in the same color as the game frame 150.
Further, the portion of the alert portion 42 that is not provided with the lever alert portion 421, the damage alert portion 422, and the general warning mark portion 423 is shown in the same color as the game frame 150. Further, the laminated portion 427 described later is colorless. In this case, the presence of the alerting unit 42 in the pachinko gaming machine 100 becomes less noticeable, and it is possible to alert the player while suppressing the deterioration of the design of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

The laminated portion 427 of the present embodiment is made of a resin material. By laminating the laminated portion 427 on one surface of the alerting portion 42, for example, when the alerting portion 42 is scratched by the player, the information displayed on the alerting portion 42 is suppressed from being erased. it can.
The structure of the laminated portion 427 may be provided on the caution sticker 41 (see FIG. 34 (A)). More specifically, a protective layer for protecting the information displayed on the warning sticker 41 may be laminated on one surface of the layer on which the information is displayed on the warning sticker 41. That is, not only the protective layer may be provided on the alerting means having the structure printed on the game frame 150, but also the protective layer may be provided on the alerting means as a sticker.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the game frame 150 may be provided with an accessory attention-calling sticker 43 that calls attention to the upper accessory 5. The accessory caution sticker 43 is attached to the game frame 150 at a position between the speaker 156 (see FIG. 1) and the frame lamp 157. That is, the accessory caution sticker 43 is affixed in the vicinity of the upper accessory 5 (see FIG. 1).
On the character alert sticker 43, a general warning mark is shown, which is a caution character unit 431 showing characters to call attention, and a character caution unit 432 to call attention regarding the existence of the upper character 5. The two general warning mark portions 433 are provided. Further, the accessory caution sticker 43 is provided with a caution character portion 431, a bonus alert portion 432, and a frame line portion 438 surrounding the two general warning mark portions 433.

The caution character unit 431 is provided at a position between the two general warning mark units 433 in the left-right direction. The alert character unit 431, together with the general warning mark unit 433, alerts the player. In the illustrated example, the text "Caution" is displayed on the caution character unit 431.
Information for alerting the player to unintentionally touch the upper accessory 5 when the upper accessory 5 moves is displayed on the accessory alert unit 432. In the illustrated example, the text "The character pops out from the upper part of the frame. Please be careful not to hit your head." Is displayed on the character warning unit 432.

The general warning mark portion 433 has an exclamation mark 434, an outer line 435 having a triangular shape and surrounding the exclamation mark 434, a background portion 436 located between the exclamation mark 434 and the outer line 435, and a triangular shape. An outline 437 surrounding the outline 435 is provided.

The exclamation mark 434 is shown in black at the center of the general warning mark portion 433.
The outline 435 is shown in black.
The background portion 436 is shown in yellow.
Outline 437 is shown in white. As described above, the color of the outline in the general warning mark portion is not limited to yellow as in the outline 418 in the warning sticker 41 (see FIG. 34 (A)).

The border portion 438 is shown in white. The frame line portion 438 surrounds the caution character portion 431, the accessory alert portion 432, and the two general warning mark portions 433, so that the information shown inside the frame line portion 438 is the character caution sticker 43. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the information is for calling attention.

The attention-calling unit 42 (see FIG. 38 (A)) and the accessory caution-calling sticker 43 are both regarded as warning-calling means for calling the player's attention. In the modified example, the attention alerting portion 42 is attached near the effect lever 161L, and the accessory alerting sticker 43 is attached near the upper accessory 5. Further, the attention alerting unit 42 pays attention to the effect lever 161L, but does not pay attention to the upper accessory 5. Further, the accessory caution sticker 43 pays attention to the upper accessory 5, but does not target the effect lever 161L. In this way, when a warning means corresponding to the vicinity of the object is provided for each object of attention, when one warning means includes information for calling attention regarding each of a plurality of objects of attention. In comparison with the above, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the target of attention in the attention calling means.

The texts displayed on the alert sticker 41, the alert portion 42, and the accessory alert sticker 43 are all displayed in a Gothic font.
In addition, when using the alerting means, any of the constituent parts such as the text, the picture, and the general warning mark shown on the alerting sticker 41, the alerting portion 42, and the character alerting sticker 43 should be careful. It may be displayed on the arousal means. In this case, the display mode of the component unit displayed on the caution means is any of the display modes of the component unit shown on the caution sticker 41, the caution unit 42, and the accessory caution sticker 43. It may be an embodiment.

(Displacement amount of operating means)
Next, the displacement amount of the effect button 161B and the displacement amount of the effect lever 161L will be described.
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the displacement amount of the effect button 161B and the displacement amount of the effect lever 161L.
The effect button 161B shown in FIG. 39 (A-1) is in a state where it is not in contact with the player. In this state, when the player presses the effect button 161B, the effect button 161B can be displaced up to the distance M1 as shown in FIG. 39 (A-2).

The effect lever 161L shown in FIG. 39 (B-1) is not in contact with the player. In this state, when the player grabs the effect lever 161L and pulls it forward, the effect lever 161L can be displaced up to the distance M2 as shown in FIG. 39 (B-2).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the distance that the effect lever 161L can be displaced by the operation of the player is longer than the distance that the effect button 161B can be displaced by the operation of the player.
In this case, the effect lever 161L has a longer displaceable distance than the effect button 161B, so that the player can easily operate the effect lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the displaceable distance of the effect lever 161L is long, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the distance that the effect lever 161L can be displaced by the operation of the player is the distance that the eject button 155 can be displaced by the operation of the player, and the effect key 162 is the distance that the effect key 162 can be displaced by the operation of the player. The distance that can be displaced, the distance that the ball lending button 163 can be displaced by the operation of the player, the distance that the return button 164 can be displaced by the operation of the player, the distance that the ball removal button 165 can be displaced by the operation of the player, The distance that the light amount adjusting unit 166 can be displaced by the operation of the player and the distance that the volume adjusting unit 167 can be displaced by the operation of the player are longer than both of them.

(Modification example of production lever 161L)
Next, the effect lever 161L of the modified example will be described.
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an effect lever 161L of a modified example.
As shown in FIG. 40, the effect button 161B is provided at the center of the game frame 150 in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the effect lever 161L is provided on the left side of the effect button 161B in the left-right direction. As described above, the effect lever 161L may be provided as a separate body from the effect button 161B. Even in this case, the caution sticker 41 is provided at a position between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction.

(Variable production pattern table)
41 and 42 are diagrams showing an example of setting a variation effect pattern and a table used in the variation effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 27 (b). Note that FIG. 41 shows a variation effect pattern table for big hits in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, and FIG. 42 shows a variation effect pattern table for small hits and misses in the low-probability time-saving no-game state.

A plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table for jackpot shown in FIG. 41. For the fluctuation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB14", and "PC1 to PC2" set using FIG. 21 above, the fluctuation effect patterns "EA1" to "EA6", "EA6", ""EB1" to "EB14" and "EC1 to EC2" are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.
Further, a plurality of variation effect patterns are set in the variation effect pattern table for small hits and misses shown in FIG. 42. The fluctuation effect patterns "ES1 to ES2" and "ER1" to "ER10" are 1: 1 with respect to the fluctuation patterns "PD1 to PD2" and "PR1" to "PR10" set using FIG. 21 above. It is associated.

Here, the variable effect is an effect for notifying the determination result (that is, whether or not a big hit) of the special symbol lottery is produced by displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
Further, in the variable effect pattern shown in the figure, "pseudo continuous number of times", "normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach", "final display color", "promotion", "effect button", and "effect lever" The production is performed by combining one or more of them. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed. Further, a description different from "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is executed.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is the number of pseudo-continuous effects (pseudo-ream). This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the variable display of one variation of the special symbol. In the pseudo continuous effect, the effect control unit 300 changes the decorative symbol before the reach state, temporarily stops the decorative symbol, and then starts the variable display of the decorative symbol again. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous production, after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are repeated for the set pseudo-continuous number of times, and then the fixed stop is performed to obtain one variation of the special symbol. Finish the variable display. Here, the temporary stop is a pseudo-stop state in which the decorative symbol seems to be stopped at first glance, but the symbol is actually slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is treated as if the fluctuation is continuing in terms of game control. Further, the fixed stop of the decorative symbol means a state in which the fixed symbol is fixed as a stopped symbol in the variable display for one variation of the special symbol.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo-continuous number" is set between "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, 0 to 3 times. In addition, the number of pseudo-consecutive times is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability) that makes a big hit expected. That is, the higher the number of pseudo-continuouss, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Normal" indicates the type of reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of reach effect.
"SP reach" indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3", the larger the number, the higher the degree of expectation.
“SPSP reach” indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3", the larger the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

The "final display color" indicates the final display color of the variable image (described later) due to the change effect. The change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the variable image. More specifically, the change effect is an effect of changing the display color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter, referred to as "display color") of the variable image. In the present embodiment, by changing the display color of the variable image or the like, the player is notified or suggested of the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. The change effect of the variable image can be executed based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process. In the illustrated example, any of "blue", "green", and "red" is selected as the final display color. For example, the final display color of the variable image may be set so that the later the order is, the higher the degree of expectation is in the order of blue, green, and red.

"Promotion" is an effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol that notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and then changing it to a decorative symbol that notifies the player that the game state will be more advantageous (promotion). Promotion production, re-lottery production). In this promotion effect, for example, after "444" is temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol, the decorative symbol of "777" is displayed as a stop symbol.

The "effect button" indicates the type of button operation effect. The button operation effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 161B. In the illustrated example, either "BU1" or "BU2" is executed as the type of button operation effect.

The effect button 161B has a plurality of effect modes. Examples of the effect mode of the effect button 161B include a mode of emitting color of the effect button 161B, a mode of blinking light emission of the effect button 161B, a mode of vibration of the effect button 161B, and the like. Examples of the emission color of the effect button 161B include a mode in which the effect button 161B emits light in red, a mode in which the effect button 161B emits light in white, and the like. Examples of the mode of blinking and emitting light of the effect button 161B include a mode of blinking and emitting light of the effect button 161B by any one of a plurality of blinking patterns. Examples of the vibration mode of the effect button 161B include a mode in which the effect button 161B is vibrated by any one of a plurality of vibration patterns.
The effect button 161B becomes an effect mode according to the type of the button operation effect during the execution of the button operation effect.

Further, as the execution timing of the button operation effect, "before temporary stop", "normal time", "SP reach time", "SPSP reach time", and "promotion fanning effect time" are provided.
"Before temporary stop" means the timing after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol and before any of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped.
The “normal time” means a timing during which the reach effect is being executed and neither the SP reach effect nor the SPSP reach effect is being executed.
“At SP reach” means the timing during execution of the SP reach effect.
“At SPSP reach” means the timing during execution of the SPSP reach effect.
"At the time of promotion fanning production" means the timing during execution of the promotion fanning production. The promotion fanning production is a production that fuels whether or not to be promoted.

The "effect lever" indicates the type of lever operation effect. The lever operation effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect lever 161L. In the illustrated example, "LE1" is executed as a lever operation effect. That is, while the button operation effect is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes, the lever operation effect is provided with one type of effect mode. The effect lever 161L becomes a specific effect mode during the execution of the lever operation effect. Examples of the specific effect mode include a mode in which the effect lever 161L emits light in a specific color, a mode in which the effect lever 161L blinks in a specific blinking pattern, a mode in which the effect lever 161L vibrates in a specific vibration pattern, and the like. ..
Further, as the execution timing of the lever operation effect, "at the time of SPSP reach" and "at the time of promotion fanning effect" are provided.

By the way, the effect control unit 300 determines the variation effect pattern based on the tables shown in FIGS. 41 and 42. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the tables shown in FIGS. 41 and 42.
For example, in FIG. 41, when the “big hit symbol” is the “high probability symbol A” and the variation pattern is “PB1”, “EB1” is selected as the variation effect pattern. Then, in this variable effect pattern "EB1", the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is "-", that is, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. Further, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach". In addition, the "final display color" is red, "promotion" is executed, "BU1" is executed as the "directing button" at "normal time", and "BU2" is executed as the "directing button" at "SPSP reach". Is executed, and "LE1" is executed as the "directing lever" at the time of "promotion fanning directing".
In the present embodiment, it has been explained that "-" in each column of the table shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the model of the pachinko game machine 100, the corresponding effect may be executed even when "-" is shown in the table column shown in FIGS. 41 and 42.

(Direction image)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing one aspect of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
As shown in FIG. 43, the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300. In the present embodiment, the effect image includes a decorative symbol 61, a variable image 51, a reserved image 52, a reserved number display 55, and a small symbol 56. Further, the image display unit 114 has a change fanning image 530, a button operation image 531 and an expected image 532, a pseudo continuous number image 533, an SP reach image 534, an SPSP reach image 535, a lever fanning front image 536, and a lever fanning rear image 537. , Lever operation image 538, promotion fanning image 539, button fanning image 540, right-handed image 542 may be displayed.
Hereinafter, each of these effect images will be described.

(Decorative pattern 61)
As shown in FIG. 43 (1), three decorative symbols 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. The three decorative symbols 61 are arranged so as to be arranged in the left-right direction. When each of the three decorative symbols 61 is described individually, the symbol arranged on the left side is arranged as "left decorative symbol 61", the symbol arranged in the center is arranged as "middle decorative symbol 61", and the symbol arranged on the right side is arranged. The design is referred to as "right decorative design 61".

In the variable effect of the decorative symbol 61, the effect control unit 300 first temporarily stops the left decorative symbol 61 (for example, the number "4") after displaying the three decorative symbols 61 in a variable manner by, for example, vertical scrolling. Next, the right decorative symbol 61 (for example, the number "6") is temporarily stopped, then the middle decorative symbol 61 (for example, the number "5") is temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative symbols 61 are fixedly stopped. In addition, the combination "456" of the decorative symbol 61 which was stopped and displayed, shown in FIG. 43 (1), is an example of the combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 61, a highly decorative display mode in which a character image or the like is displayed in addition to characters such as numbers (see FIG. 43 (1)) and a number or the like are used. There is a display mode with low decorativeness (see FIG. 48-1 (1)) in which characters are mainly displayed. Here, the display mode of the decorative symbol 61 is switched according to a change in the gaming state or the progress of the effect. Details will be described later, but for example, the decorative symbol 61 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, and the high-probability time-saving game state, and the decorative symbol 61 with low decorativeness is displayed in other cases. Will be done.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in FIG. 43 (1), the image display unit 114 is informed that the special symbol is being changed (during the variation display of the decorative symbol 61) by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like). The variable image 51 shown is displayed. Then, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower central portion in the display area of the image display unit 114) at the same time as the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The display disappears when the movement of the symbol stops. Further, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variable image 51 is determined based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process. Further, the variable image 51 may notify or suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process, for example, by changing the display mode such as the display color.

(Hold image 52)
As shown in FIG. 43 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the reserved image 52 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the current reserved sphere in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). That is, the reserved image 52 is an image indicating that the right to determine the jackpot is reserved. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.
Further, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the variable pedestal of the reserved image 52 are displayed in different modes.

Further, the reserved image 52 notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the display mode such as the display color based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process. Here, the display mode such as the display color of the reserved image 52 is set so that the display mode of the type with higher expectation is higher when the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment process is a big hit than when it is out of order. ing. For example, when white, blue, green, and red are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the degree of expectation may be set to be higher in this order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 are basically composed of the same or similar forms, respectively. However, the form may be different between the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51, or between the plurality of reserved images 52, depending on the content of the effect and the progress of the effect.

(Holding number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 43 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the hold ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). The hold number display 55 is an image showing the hold number. Here, the number of the reserved images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of reserved images for winning each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122.

(Small design 56)
Here, the display position, display size, design, and the like of the decorative design 61 may change with the progress of, for example, the variation effect. Further, the decorative symbol 61 may be completely or partially hidden by a movable accessory 115 that can be moved with respect to the display screen of the image display unit 114. In such a case, the decorative symbol for notifying the player that the special symbol is originally displayed in a variable manner may be difficult for the player to see.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the small symbol 56 is displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 to notify the player that the special symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, by displaying the small symbol 56, the notification of the jackpot determination result by the decorative symbol 61 and the notification of the type of the jackpot indicated by the decorative symbol 61 are assisted. ..
In the embodiment, the small symbol 56 is displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 in such a manner that the player can always see it. That is, the small symbol 56 is not completely or partially hidden by other images, the movable accessory 115, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 43 (1), the small symbol 56 is composed of three symbols corresponding to the decorative symbol 61. The three small symbols 56 are arranged so as to be arranged in the vertical direction at the right corner of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small symbol 56 is displayed as an image having a smaller display size than the decorative symbol 61. Further, as described above, the decorative symbol 61 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small symbol 56 may be displayed in a less decorative display mode. Only displayed in.
The small symbol 56 is not limited to the case where the image display unit 114 is provided with one pair with the three symbols as one pair. For example, in the small symbol 56, two or more pairs may be displayed at the same time on the image display unit 114.

(Change fanning image 530)
As shown in FIG. 44 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a change fanned image 530 that encourages whether or not the display mode of the variable image 51 changes. The change fanned image 530 is displayed in a part of the display area of the variable image 51. The change fanned image 530 may be displayed in any color including a color that can be displayed as the variable image 51. Further, when the change fanned image 530 is displayed, the display area of the change fanned image 530 may be widened or narrowed. Further, the change fanning image 530 may be an effect image that acts on the variable image 51 in order to change the display mode such as the display color of the variable image 51, and is not limited to an image of a specific color. Further, the change fanned image 530 may act not only on the variable image 51 but also on the reserved image 52.

(Button operation image 531)
As shown in FIG. 44 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a button operation image 531 that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161B. By displaying this button operation image 531 it is possible to recognize that it is the timing for the player to operate the effect button 161B. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed as the button operation image 531. Further, the button operation image 531 displays a gauge indicating a period during which the operation of the effect button 161B is valid.

(Expected image 532)
As shown in FIG. 44 (6), the image display unit 114 displays an expected image 532 that makes the player expect the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be a big hit. In the illustrated example, as the expected image 532, an image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed.

(Pseudo continuous number image 533)
As shown in FIG. 45-1 (7), the image display unit 114 displays a pseudo-continuous number image 533 indicating the number of pseudo-continuous times. In the illustrated example, since it is the second variation display, the pseudo continuous number image 533 includes an image of “x2”.

(SP reach image 534)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (11), the image display unit 114 displays an SP reach image 534 indicating that the SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 534 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.

(SPSP reach image 535)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (12), the image display unit 114 displays an SPSP reach image 535 indicating that the SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP reach image 535 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

(Lever fanning front image 536)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (13), the image display unit 114 displays a lever fanning pre-stage image 536 that encourages the lever operation effect to be performed. As the lever fanning front stage image 536, an image imitating a part of the effect lever 161L is displayed. In the illustrated example, as the lever fanning front stage image 536, an image imitating a part of the effect lever 161L and an image imitating another part of the effect lever 161L are displayed.

(Lever fanning post-stage image 537)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (14), the image display unit 114 displays an image 537 after the lever fanning, which encourages the lever operation effect to be performed. The lever fanning rear stage image 537 is displayed after the lever fanning front stage image 536 is displayed. As the image 537 after the lever fanning, an image imitating the effect lever 161L is displayed. Further, as the image 537 after the lever fanning, an image imitating a flame is displayed in the background of the image imitating the effect lever 161L.

(Lever operation image 538)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (15), the image display unit 114 displays a lever operation image 538 that urges the player to operate the effect lever 161L. By displaying this lever operation image 538, it is possible to recognize that it is the timing for the player to operate the effect lever 161L. In the illustrated example, as the lever operation image 538, an image imitating the effect lever 161L and an image imitating a flame are displayed. Further, the lever operation image 538 displays a gauge indicating a period during which the operation of the effect lever 161L is effective. Further, in the lever operation image 538, the text "Close !!" that urges the player to operate the effect lever 161L is displayed. Further, the display size of the lever operation image 538 of the present embodiment is larger than the display size of the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 44 (5)).

(Promotion fan image 539)
As shown in FIG. 45-3 (18), the image display unit 114 displays a promotion fanned image 539 that encourages whether or not promotion is performed.

(Button fan image 540)
As shown in FIG. 46-2 (9), the image display unit 114 displays a button fanning image 540 that encourages the button operation effect to be performed. As the button fanning image 540, an image in which an image imitating the effect button 161B moves from the right side to the center portion in the display area of the image display unit 114 is displayed.

(Right-handed image 542)
As shown in FIG. 48-1 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a right-handed image 542 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described.
Note that FIG. 43 is a variation effect executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 42. When "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern", an effect such as "normal" is not executed.

(Variable production example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 43 (1), the highly decorative decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped on the screen of the image display unit 114 when the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol. It is assumed that it has been done. At this time, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "1", and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122 indicates "0". Further, at this time, the effect operating device 161 is in a non-protruding state (see FIG. 32 (A)), and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (2), the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol. In this way, when the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variation image 51. When it is shown in the drawing that the decorative symbol 61 and the small symbol 56 are variablely displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed, the decorative symbol 61 and the small symbol 56 are indicated by arrows (↓), respectively, for the sake of clarity. .. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates “0”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (3), the left decorative symbol 61 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1", which is the left decorative symbol 61, temporarily stops. When indicating that the decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using a display similar to the double quotation mark around the decorative symbol 61 for easy understanding.
Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (4), the right decorative symbol 61 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "3", which is the right decorative symbol 61, temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (5), the intermediate decorative symbol 61 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "2", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 61, temporarily stops.
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 43 (6), the three decorative symbols 61 are fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "123" of the decorative symbol 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "123" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 61.

(Variable production example 2)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 will be described with reference to FIG. 44.
Note that FIG. 44 is a variation effect executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 42. When "ER2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern", "N1" is executed as the "normal" and the "final display color" is "blue". In addition, "BU1" is executed as the "effect button" at the "normal time". Further, in the following description, the points different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 44 (1), the effect control unit 300 terminates the variation of the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 definitely stops the highly decorative decorative symbol 61. It is assumed that there is.
Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (2), the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol. At this time, the change effect is started. During the execution of this change effect, the change fanning image 530 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed as the change fanning image 530.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (3), the display color of the variable image 51 changes to blue due to the change effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (4), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped to bring it into the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (5), an operation effect is performed. During the execution of this operation effect, the button operation image 531 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, the expected image 532 is displayed as shown in FIG. 44 (6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (7), the intermediate decorative symbol 61 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the number "5".
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 44 (8), the three decorative symbols 61 are fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "454" of the decorative symbol 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 61.

(Variable production example 3)
45-1 to 45-3 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45-1 to 45-3.
45-1 to 45-3 are variation effects executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 41. When "EA3" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", "pseudo-continuous number" is "2", "N2" is executed as "normal", and "SP2" is set as "SP reach". It is executed, "SPSP2" is executed as "SPSP reach", and "final display color" is "red". Further, "BU1" is executed as the "effect button" at "before temporary stop" and "at the time of promotion fanning effect", and "LE1" is executed as the "effect lever" at "SPSP reach". Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned effects will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned variable effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (1), the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 stops determining the highly decorative decorative symbol 61. It is assumed that it has been done. At this time, the reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (2), the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol. In this way, when the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variation image 51. At this time, a change effect is performed. During the execution of this change effect, the change fanning image 530 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a red image is displayed as the change fanning image 530.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (3), the display color of the variable image 51 changes to red due to the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (4), the button operation effect is executed. While the button operation effect is being executed, the button operation image 531 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, the accessory effect is performed as shown in FIG. 45-1 (5).
The accessory effect is an effect in which the movable accessory 115 moves to the front side of the image display unit 114 and covers the whole or a part of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side of the three movable accessory 115 (see FIG. 1) covers a part of the image display unit 114. Further, the accessory effect in which the movable accessory 115 arranged in the center moves is better than the accessory effect in which the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side of the three movable accessory 115 moves. It is set to have high expectations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (6), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. More specifically, for example, after temporarily stopping the number "6" which is the left decorative symbol 61, the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, and a pseudo continuous effect is produced in the middle decorative symbol 61. Stop the icon labeled "NEXT" which means to do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (7), the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is restarted. At this time, the pseudo continuous number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since it is the second variation display, the pseudo continuous number image 533 includes an image of “x2”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (8), after the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "1" which is the right decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, and the middle Temporarily stop the "NEXT" icon in the decorative pattern 61.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (9), the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is restarted. That is, the third variation display of the decorative symbol 61 is started. Further, on the screen of the image display unit 114, a pseudo continuous number image 533 indicating "x3" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (10), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped to bring it into the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (11), the SP reach effect is executed. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 534 is displayed. Further, when the SP reach effect is being executed, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in a small display mode and a display mode with low decorativeness.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (12), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 535 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (13), the lever fanning front stage image 536 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (14), the latter stage image 537 of the lever fanning is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (15), a lever operation effect is performed. During the execution of this lever operation effect, the lever operation image 538 is displayed. Further, at this time, the effect operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32 (A)) to the projecting state (see FIG. 32 (B)), and the player can operate the effect lever 161L.

Then, when the player operates the effect lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is displayed, the accessory effect is performed as shown in FIG. 45-2 (16). In the illustrated example, the movable accessory 115 arranged in the center of the three movable accessory 115 covers a part of the image display unit 114 as the accessory effect. Further, at this time, the effect operating device 161 changes from the protruding state to the non-projecting state, and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-3 (17), the doublet decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, by displaying the decorative symbol 61 in the combination of "444", the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, at this time, the display size of the decorative symbol 61 is larger than that of the display mode (see FIG. 45-2 (11)) during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Further, the small symbol 56 maintains a state in which the three symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-3 (18), the promotion fanning effect is performed. During the execution of this promotion fanning effect, the promotion fanning image 539 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-3 (19), a button operation effect is performed. While the button operation effect is being executed, the button operation image 531 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed again in the combination of "444" as shown in FIG. 45-3 (20). That is, as a result of the promotion fanning effect, the promotion is not performed.
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 61 is stopped as shown in FIG. 45-3 (21). The combination of numbers "444" of the decorative symbol 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, "444" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 61 and the small symbol 56 are matched by the combination of "444".

As described above, in the variable effect example 3, the effect using the effect button 161B is first performed, and then the effect using the effect lever 161L is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, a variable effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used earlier than the effect lever 161L and a variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used earlier than the effect button 161B are provided. ing. Further, the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used first is selected is higher than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used first is selected. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation effect includes a special variation effect in which both the effect lever 161L and the effect button 161B are used. Then, the effect control unit 300 is easier to execute the special variation effect in which the effect button 161B is used first than the special variation effect in which the effect lever 161L is used first.
In this case, since the player can easily operate the effect lever 161L after gaining interest by operating the effect button 161B, the player is likely to get excited when operating the effect lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

It should be noted that the special variation effect in which the effect lever 161L is used first may be easier to execute than the special variation effect in which the effect button 161B is used first. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.
In this case, the player may not be accustomed to the operation of the operating means when operating the effect lever 161L which is used earlier among the effect lever 161L and the effect button 161B. Therefore, the player may violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, when the player operates the effect lever 161L, the attention-calling sticker 41 is likely to enter the player's field of view, and the player can be alerted to the operation of the effect lever 161L. Therefore, even if the player is not accustomed to the operation of the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the special variation effect, the effect button 161B may be used first without the effect lever 161L being used first. That is, in order to make it easier to execute the special variation effect in which the effect button 161B is used first than in the special variation effect in which the effect lever 161L is used first, the special variation effect in which the effect lever 161L is used first is executed. It is also included that the special variation effect in which the effect button 161B is used first is always executed (100%) without doing so (0%).

Further, in both the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 3, the effect using the effect button 161B is performed. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 3, the effect using the effect lever 161L is performed, but in the variable effect example 2, the effect using the effect lever 161L is not performed. Here, in the present embodiment, a variable effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used and a variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used are provided. Further, the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used is selected is lower than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used is selected. That is, in the present embodiment, it is more difficult for the effect control unit 300 to execute the variable effect using the effect lever 161L than the variable effect using the effect button 161B.
In this case, the player is more likely to be excited when operating the effect lever 161L because the effect using the effect lever 161L is more valuable than the effect using the effect button 161B. Become. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.
It should be noted that the variable effect using the effect button 161B may be more difficult to execute than the variable effect using the effect lever 161L. That is, the configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.

Further, in the variation effect example 2, the effect button 161B is used without using the effect lever 161L, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery related to this variation effect is out of order. On the other hand, in the variation effect example 3, the effect lever 161L is used, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery related to this variation effect is a big hit. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variable effect pattern for the jackpot, a variable effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used without using the effect lever 161L and a variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used are provided. .. Further, as the variation effect pattern for disengagement, a variation effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used without using the effect lever 161L and a variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used are provided. Then, as the variation effect pattern for disengagement, the probability that the variation effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used without using the effect lever 161L is selected rather than the probability that the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used is selected. Is higher. Further, as the variable effect pattern for the jackpot, the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used is selected rather than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used without using the effect lever 161L is selected. Is higher. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a higher expectation that the jackpot game will be executed in the variable effect in which the effect lever 161L is used than in the variable effect in which the effect button 161B is used without using the effect lever 161L.
In this case, the player is more likely to get excited when operating the effect lever 161L because of the higher expectation. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.
It should be noted that the variable effect in which the effect button 161B is used without using the effect lever 161L may have a higher expectation that the jackpot game will be executed than the variable effect in which the effect lever 161L is used. That is, the configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.

Further, the variation effect example 2 is a variation effect in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect, and the effect lever 161L is not used during the execution of the variation effect. On the other hand, the variation effect example 3 is a variation effect in which the SP reach effect is executed, and the effect lever 161L is used during the execution of the variation effect. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, a variation effect pattern in which the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect are executed, and a variation in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect. Each production pattern is provided. Further, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, a variable effect pattern in which the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect are executed and a variable effect pattern in which the normal reach effect is executed without the SP reach effect are executed, respectively. It is provided. As the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect, rather than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect are executed is selected. The probability that a variable effect pattern is selected is higher. Further, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect are executed rather than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect is selected. The probability that the variable effect pattern is selected is higher. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation effect includes a first variation effect in which the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect are executed, and a second variation effect in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect. .. Then, the effect control unit 300 is more likely to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L in the first variable effect than in the second variable effect.
In this case, the player is more likely to win the jackpot in the variable effect in which the SP reach effect is executed than in the variable effect in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect. , It becomes easy to get excited when operating the effect lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

It should be noted that the effect lever 161L is not used during the execution of the variable effect in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect, and the effect lever 161L is used during the execution of the variable effect in which the SP reach effect is executed. It may be used. That is, in order to make it easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L in the first variable effect than in the second variable effect, the effect using the effect lever 161L is not performed in the second variable effect (0%). ), In the first variable effect, the effect that the effect lever 161L is used is always performed (100%).
Further, the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is easier to execute the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used than the variable effect in which the SP reach effect is executed without executing the SPSP reach effect. May be good.

Further, even if the variable effect in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect is easier to execute the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used than the variable effect in which the SP reach effect is executed. Good. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted. In this case, even during the execution of the variable effect in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect, the player expects to win the jackpot by performing the effect using the effect lever 161L. However, it becomes easy to get excited when operating the effect lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 for the player. Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, the variation effect example 2 is a variation effect in which the variation time is 60.01 seconds (see FIG. 21), and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variation effect. On the other hand, the variation effect example 3 is a variation effect in which the variation time is 90.13 seconds, and the effect lever 161L is used in this variation effect. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, a variation effect pattern having a variation time of 90.00 seconds or less and a variation effect pattern having a variation time longer than 90.00 seconds are used. It is provided. Further, as the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, a variation effect pattern in which the variation time is 90.00 seconds or less and a variation effect pattern in which the variation time is longer than 90.00 seconds are provided. As the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the variation effect pattern in which the variation time is 90.00 seconds or less is higher than the probability that the variation effect pattern having the variation time longer than 90.00 seconds is selected. The probability of being selected is higher. Further, as the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, a variation effect pattern having a variation time longer than 90.00 seconds is selected rather than the probability that a variation effect pattern having a variation time of 90.00 seconds or less is selected. The probability of being done is higher. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation effect includes a first time variation effect in which the variation display is executed for the first time and a second time variation effect in which the variation display is executed for the second time different from the first time. Then, the effect control unit 300 is more likely to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L in the second time variation effect than in the first time variation effect. Here, the first time may be any time, and for example, a time of 15.00 seconds or less, a time of 30.00 seconds or less, a time of 60.00 seconds or less, and a time of 90.00 seconds or less. Time etc. can be mentioned.
In this case, the second time variation effect is more likely to be excited when the player operates the effect lever 161L than the first time variation effect because the player's interest is more likely to increase as the game progresses. Become. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In the present embodiment, when the above first time is regarded as 90.00 seconds, the effect lever 161L is not used during the execution of the first time variation effect (FIGS. 21, 41, (See FIG. 42), but is not limited to this. If it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L in the second time variation effect than in the first time variation effect, even if the effect using the effect lever 161L is executed during the execution of the first time variation effect. Good. Further, the effect lever 161L may not be used during the execution of the first time variation effect, and the effect lever 161L may be used during the execution of the second time variation effect. That is, the effect that the effect lever 161L is used is easier to execute in the second time variation effect than in the first time variation effect, so that the effect lever 161L is used during the execution of the first time variation effect. Is not executed (0%), and the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used is always executed (100%) during the execution of the second time variation effect.

Further, it may be easier to execute the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used when the first time variation effect is being executed than when the second time variation effect is being executed. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted. In this case, even during the execution of the variable effect with a short variation time, the player expects to win the jackpot by performing the effect using the effect lever 161L, and is excited when operating the effect lever 161L. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 for the player. Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the variation effect example 2, the “final display color” (see FIG. 42) of the variation image 51 is a variation effect of “blue”, and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variation effect. On the other hand, in the variation effect example 3, the "final display color" (see FIG. 41) of the variation image 51 is "red", and the effect lever 161L is used in this variation effect. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the first display mode and a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the second display mode are used. It is provided. Further, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the first display mode and a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the second display mode are provided. As the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the variation effect pattern in which the variation image 51 is the first display mode is more than the probability that the variation effect pattern in which the variation image 51 is the second display mode is selected. The probability of being selected is higher. Further, as the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, the variation effect pattern in which the variation image 51 is the second display mode is selected rather than the probability that the variation effect pattern in which the variation image 51 is the first display mode is selected. The probability of being done is higher. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 is executing the variation display related to the variation image 51 of the second display mode rather than executing the variation display related to the variation image 51 of the first display mode. It is easy to perform an effect using the effect lever 161L. Examples of the first display mode include white, blue, and green. Further, as the second display mode, for example, there are display modes such as blue, green, and red that are expected to perform a jackpot game more than the first display mode.
In this case, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the variable display related to the variable image 51 of the second display mode is being executed than when the variable display related to the variable image 51 of the first display mode is being executed. , The player is likely to be excited when operating the effect lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

It should be noted that it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L during the execution of the variation display according to the variation image 51 of the first display mode than during the execution of the variation display related to the variation image 51 of the second display mode. You may do so. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted. In this case, even during the execution of the variable effect in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is low, the player expects the jackpot to be won and operates the effect lever 161L by performing the effect using the effect lever 161L. It becomes easy to get excited at the time. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 for the player. Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, the variation effect example 2 is a variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variation effect. On the other hand, the variation effect example 3 is a variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the effect lever 161L is used in this variation effect. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variable effect pattern for the jackpot, a variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used and a variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used are provided. Further, as the variation effect pattern for disengagement, a variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used and a variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used are provided. As the variation effect pattern for disconnection, the probability that the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used is selected is higher than the probability that the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used is selected. .. Further, as the variable effect pattern for the jackpot, the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used is selected is higher than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used is selected. .. That is, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the variation effect according to the determination result determined to execute the jackpot game is executed and the case where the variation effect according to the determination result not determined to execute the jackpot game is executed. The execution probability of the effect using the effect lever 161L is different.
In this case, there are cases where the variation effect according to the determination result determined to execute the jackpot game is executed and the variation effect according to the determination result not determined to execute the jackpot game. The player's interest in the effect using the effect lever 161L increases as compared with the case where the effect using the lever 161L is executed with the same probability. Therefore, the player gets excited when operating the effect lever 161L and becomes easy to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player unintentionally touches a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. There is a risk that the effect lever 161L will be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In the present embodiment, the variation effect according to the determination result determined to execute the jackpot game is executed rather than the variation effect according to the determination result not determined to execute the jackpot game. In the case, it is easier to execute the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used.
In this case, when the effect using the effect lever 161L is performed, the player will expect to win the jackpot, and will be easily excited when operating the effect lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In addition, the case where the variation effect according to the determination result that is not determined to execute the jackpot game is executed is more than the case where the variation effect according to the determination result determined to execute the jackpot game is executed. The effect lever 161L may be used to facilitate the effect. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.
In this case, even if a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the effect of using the effect lever 161L is performed, so that the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less entertaining. Further, by using the caution sticker 41 to alert the player regarding the operation of the effect lever 161L, the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or the effect lever 161L may move. It can be suppressed from being damaged.

Further, the variation effect example 2 is a variation effect in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed, and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variation effect. On the other hand, the variation effect example 3 is a variation effect in which a pseudo continuous effect is performed, and the effect lever 161L is used in this variation effect. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, a variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed and a variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed are provided, respectively. Further, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, a variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed and a variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed are provided, respectively. As the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed is selected rather than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed is selected. It's high. Further, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed is selected is higher than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed is selected. doing. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a pseudo-continuous effect in which a plurality of decorative symbols 61 are pseudo-variable. Then, it is easier to execute the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used in the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed than in the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed.
In this case, in the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the player is more likely to be excited when operating the effect lever 161L by the amount of expecting the jackpot to be won, as compared with the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed. .. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.
It should be noted that the variable effect that does not execute the pseudo continuous effect may be easier to execute the effect that uses the effect lever 161L than the variable effect that executes the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.

Further, the effect lever 161L may not be used for the variable effect in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed, and the effect lever 161L may be used for the variable effect in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed. That is, it is easier to execute the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used in the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed than in the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. It is also included that the effect in which the lever 161L is used is not executed (0%), and the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used is always executed (100%) in the variable effect in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed.

Further, the variation effect example 1 is a variation effect related to the variation image 51 whose display color is white, and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variation effect. On the other hand, the variation effect example 3 is a variation effect related to the variation image 51 whose display color is red, and the effect lever 161L is used in this variation effect. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, a variation effect pattern relating to the variation image 51 having a white display color and a variation effect pattern relating to the variation image 51 having a red display color are used. It is provided. Further, as the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, a variation effect pattern relating to the variation image 51 having a white display color and a variation effect pattern relating to the variation image 51 having a red display color are provided. As the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the variation effect pattern related to the variation image 51 having a white display color is more important than the probability that the variation effect pattern related to the variation image 51 having a red display color is selected. The probability of being selected is higher. Further, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, the variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 having a red display color is selected rather than the probability that the variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 having a white display color is selected. The probability of being done is higher. That is, in the present embodiment, it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L during the execution of the second variation effect than during the execution of the first variation effect. Here, as the first variation effect, for example, a variation effect related to the variation image 51 whose display color is white can be mentioned. Further, the second variable effect is a variable effect that makes it expected that the jackpot game is executed more than the first variable effect. Examples of the second variation effect include variation effects related to the variation image 51 whose display colors are blue, green, red, and the like. The first variable effect may be, for example, a variable effect in which the reach effect is not performed. Then, the second variable effect may be, for example, a variable effect in which a reach effect is performed.
In this case, in the second variable effect, the player is more likely to be excited when operating the effect lever 161L by the amount of expecting the jackpot to be won, as compared with the first variable effect. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.
It should be noted that the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used may be more easily executed when the first variation effect is being executed than when the second variation effect is being executed. That is, the configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display size of the lever operation image 538 (see FIG. 45-2 (15)) is larger than the display size of the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 45-1 (4)). That is, in the present embodiment, the display area of the lever operation image 538 is larger than the display area of the button operation image 531.
In this case, the player is more likely to be excited when operating the effect lever 161L because the lever operation image 538 feels more powerful than the button operation image 531. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, before the operation of the effect lever 161L can be accepted, first, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (13), an image imitating a part of the effect lever 161L is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (14), an image imitating the entire effect lever 161L is displayed, and then the operation of the effect lever 161L can be accepted as shown in FIG. 45-2 (15). become.
In this case, compared to the case where the operation of the effect lever 161L can be accepted after the image imitating the entire effect lever 161L is displayed without displaying the image imitating a part of the effect lever 161L. The player is further encouraged as to whether or not the operation effect is performed. Therefore, the player gets excited when operating the effect lever 161L and becomes easy to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player unintentionally touches a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. There is a risk that the effect lever 161L will be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (15), the lever operation image 538 displays an image imitating a flame as an image for inciting the player to operate the effect lever 161L. That is, in the present embodiment, an image with a decoration different from that of the effect lever 161L is displayed as an image for inciting the player to operate the effect lever 161L on the instruction image prompting the operation of the effect lever 161L. ..
In this case, the player is more likely to be excited when operating the effect lever 161L as compared with the case where an image different from the effect lever 161L is not displayed in the instruction image. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect button 161B is operated, the effect effect of moving the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side of the three movable accessory 115 is executed. On the other hand, when the effect lever 161L is operated, the effect effect of moving the movable accessory 115 arranged at the center of the three movable accessory 115 is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory 115 that moves when the effect button 161B is operated does not move when the effect lever 161L is operated. In other words, there is a higher expectation that the jackpot game will be executed in the character effect performed when the effect lever 161L is operated than in the character effect performed when the effect button 161B is operated.
In this case, the player has a higher expectation for the character effect performed when the effect lever 161L is operated than the character effect performed when the effect button 161B is operated. It becomes easy to get excited when operating the 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, the variation effect example 1 is a variation effect in which the effect button 161B is not used, and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variation effect. On the other hand, the variation effect example 3 is a variation effect in which the effect button 161B is used, and in this variation effect, the effect lever 161L is used. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 is executing the variable effect in which the effect using the effect button 161B is performed, rather than the effect in which the effect button 161B is used in the effect. , It is easy to perform an effect using the effect lever 161L.

Further, the variation effect example 1 is a variation effect in which the reach effect is not executed, and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variation effect. On the other hand, the variation effect example 3 is a variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, and the effect lever 161L is used in this variation effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 executes the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used during the variable effect in which the reach effect is executed, rather than in the execution of the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed. Easy to do. It should be noted that the reach effect is not executed because it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L during the variable effect in which the reach effect is executed than in the execution of the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed. The effect in which the effect lever 161L is used is not executed (0%) during the execution of the variable effect, and the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used is always executed during the execution of the reach effect (100%). ) Is also included.

Further, in the variable effect example 3, an effect in which the effect lever 161L is used after the start of the reach effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, in the variable effect, the effect control unit 300 is more likely to execute the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used after the start of the reach effect than before the start of the reach effect. It should be noted that, in the variable effect, it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L after the start of the reach effect than before the start of the reach effect. It is also included that the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used is not executed (0%), and the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used is always executed (100%) after the start of the reach effect in the variable effect.

Further, in the variation effect example 3, as shown in FIGS. 45-1 (4) and 45-1 (5), even if the effect button 161B is operated, the lottery result of the special symbol is not notified. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 45-2 (15) to 45-3 (17), when the effect lever 161L is operated, the lottery result of the special symbol is notified. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 is more likely to perform the effect of notifying the lottery result of the special symbol in response to the operation of the effect lever 161L than the effect button 161B. In other words, the effect lever 161L tends to have a shorter time from the operation to the final stop of the decorative symbol 61 than the effect button 161B.

Further, in the variable effect example 3, the effect button 161B is used twice, whereas the effect lever 161L is used once. That is, in the present embodiment, in the variable effect, the effect control unit 300 tends to reduce the number of executions in the effect using the effect lever 161L than in the effect using the effect button 161B.

Further, in the variation effect example 3, in the variation effect, the effect button 161B is used when none of the decorative symbols 61 is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the effect lever 161L is used when the decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped. That is, in the present embodiment, in the effect control unit 300, the effect using the effect lever 161L is more effective than the effect using the effect button 161B when the decorative symbol 61 is not temporarily stopped in the variable effect. Difficult to carry out. It should be noted that the effect using the effect lever 161L is more difficult to execute when the decorative symbols 61 are not temporarily stopped in the variable effect than the effect using the effect button 161B. When none of the symbols 61 is temporarily stopped, the effect lever 161L is not executed (0%), and in the variable effect, the effect button 161B is used when none of the decorative symbols 61 is temporarily stopped. Is also included to always execute (100%).

(Variable production example 4)
46-1 to 46-3 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46-1 to 46-3.
It should be noted that FIGS. 46-1 to 46-3 are variation effects executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 41. When "EB1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern", the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is "-", that is, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. Further, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach", and the "final display color" is "red". In addition, "promotion" is executed, "BU1" is executed as "effect button" at "normal time", "BU2" is executed as "button effect" at "SPSP reach", and "promotion fanning effect". "LE1" is executed as a "directing lever". Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned effects will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned variable effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (1), as the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the highly decorative decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. It is assumed that it has been done. At this time, the reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (2), the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol. In this way, when the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variation image 51. At this time, a change effect is performed. During the execution of this change effect, the change fanning image 530 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a red image is displayed as the change fanning image 530.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (3), the display color of the variable image 51 changes to red due to the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (4), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped to bring it into the reach state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (5), the button operation effect is executed. In this button operation effect, the button operation image 531 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, the accessory effect is performed as shown in FIG. 46-1 (6). In this accessory effect, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side of the three movable accessory 115 (see FIG. 1) covers a part of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (7), the SP reach effect is executed. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 534 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (8), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 535 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (9), the button fanning image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (10), a button operation effect is performed. In this button operation effect, the button operation image 531 is displayed. Further, at this time, the button operation image 531 is displayed in a display mode different from that of the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 46-1 (5)) displayed during the execution of the normal reach effect. More specifically, as the button operation image 531 an image imitating the effect button 161B that emits red light is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, the accessory effect is performed as shown in FIG. 46-2 (11). In this accessory production, the movable accessory 115 arranged at the center of the three movable accessories 115 covers a part of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (12), the doublet decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, by displaying the decorative symbol 61 in the combination of "444", the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (13), the promotion fanning effect is performed. During the execution of this promotion fanning effect, the promotion fanning image 539 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (14), the lever fanning front stage image 536 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (15), the latter stage image 537 of the lever fanning is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (16), a lever operation effect is performed. During the execution of this lever operation effect, the lever operation image 538 is displayed. Further, at this time, the effect operating device 161 changes from the non-projecting state to the protruding state, and the player can operate the effect lever 161L.

Then, when the player operates the effect lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is displayed, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in the combination of "777" as shown in FIGS. 46-3 (17). That is, it is promoted as a result of the promotion fanning production. Further, at this time, the effect operating device 161 changes from the protruding state to the non-projecting state, and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 61 is stopped as shown in FIG. 46-3 (18). The combination “777” of the decorative symbols 61 that have been stopped and displayed, shown in FIG. 46-3 (18), is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. In addition, "777" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 61 and the small symbol 56 are matched by the combination of "777".

As described above, in the variable effect example 4, the effect button 161B has a plurality of types of effect (see FIG. 41), whereas the effect lever 161L has one type of effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of the effect modes of the effect lever 161L and the number of the effect modes of the effect button 161B are different.
In this case, the player for the effect lever 161L and the effect button 161B, which has a larger number of effect modes, as compared with the case where the number of effect modes of the effect lever 161L and the number of effect modes of the effect button 161B are the same. Can increase the interest of. Further, by using the caution sticker 41 to alert the player regarding the operation of the effect lever 161L, the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or the effect lever 161L may move. It can be suppressed from being damaged.

In this embodiment, the number of effect modes of the effect lever 161L is smaller than the number of effect modes of the effect button 161B. In this case, the player's interest in the effect button 161B can be further increased.
Further, the number of effect modes of the effect lever 161L may be larger than the number of effect modes of the effect button 161B. In this case, the player's interest in the effect lever 161L can be further increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect mode of the effect lever 161L is one type, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect mode of the effect lever 161L may be two or more types. Further, the effect mode of the effect button 161B may be three or more types.
Further, the effect mode of the effect button 161B is not limited to the effect mode of the effect button 161B during execution of the button operation effect. That is, the effect mode of the effect button 161B may include the effect mode of the effect button 161B when the operation of the effect button 161B is not effective. Further, the effect mode of the effect lever 161L is not limited to the effect mode of the effect lever 161L during the execution of the lever operation effect. That is, the effect mode of the effect lever 161L may include the effect mode of the effect lever 161L when the operation of the effect lever 161L is not effective.

Further, the effect mode of the effect button 161B may include a display mode of the button operation image 531. That is, the effect mode of the effect button 161B may include the effect mode related to the effect button 161B.
Further, the effect mode of the effect lever 161L may include the display mode of the lever operation image 538. That is, the effect mode of the effect lever 161L may include an effect mode related to the effect lever 161L.

Further, the variation effect example 3 is a variation effect in which the effect button 161B is used in the promotion fanning effect, and promotion is not performed in this variation effect. On the other hand, the variation effect example 4 is a variation effect in which the effect lever 161L is used in the promotion fanning effect, and promotion is performed in this variation effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 uses the effect lever 161L in the variable effect in which the promotion is performed after the promotion fanning effect, rather than in the variable effect in which the promotion is not performed after the promotion fanning effect. Easy to execute.

(Operation validity period)
Next, the period during which the operation of the effect lever 161L is effective and the period during which the operation of the effect button 161B is effective will be described.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which the operation of the effect lever 161L is effective in the variation effect example 3 and a period during which the operation of the effect button 161B is effective in the variation effect example 4.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A), in the variation effect example 3, the lever fanning front stage image 536 (see FIG. 45-2 (13)) is displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Further, when the time T1 elapses after the lever fanning previous stage image 536 is displayed, the lever operation image 538 (see FIG. 45-2 (15)) is displayed, and the operation of the effect lever 161L becomes effective. Here, a period T2 is set as a period during which the operation of the effect lever 161L is effective, and if the effect lever 161L is operated before this period T2 elapses, the operation of the effect lever 161L is accepted and the accessory. The production (see FIG. 45-2 (16)) is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), in the variation effect example 4, the button fanning image 540 (see FIG. 46-2 (9)) is displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Further, when the time T3 elapses after the button fanning image 540 is displayed, the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 46-2 (10)) is displayed, and the operation of the effect button 161B becomes effective. Here, the time T3 is shorter than the time T1. Further, a period T4 is set as a period during which the operation of the effect button 161B is valid, and if the effect button 161B is operated before this period T4 elapses, the operation of the effect button 161B is accepted, and the effect effect is produced. (See FIG. 46-2 (11)). Here, the period T4 is a shorter time than the period T2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the effect lever 161L is performed after the lever fanning previous stage image 536 is displayed, rather than the time T3 from the display of the button fanning image 540 to the activation of the operation of the effect button 161B. The time until it becomes effective T1 is longer. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect lever 161L can be accepted before the operation of the effect lever 161L can be accepted. In addition, it is possible to execute a second suggestion effect suggesting that the operation on the effect button 161B can be accepted before the operation on the effect button 161B can be accepted. Then, rather than the time from the start of the second suggestion effect to the acceptance of the operation to the effect button 161B, the time from the start of the first suggestion effect to the acceptance of the operation to the effect lever 161L. The time is longer.
In this case, the player is excited when the effect lever 161L can be operated because the effect lever 161L has a longer time to suggest that the operation can be accepted than the effect button 161B. It will be easier. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period T2 in which the operation to the effect lever 161L is effective is longer than the period T4 in which the operation to the effect button 161B is effective. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a first effective period in which the operation of the effect lever 161L is effective and a second effective period in which the operation of the effect button is effective. The first validity period is longer than the second validity period.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L has a longer effective period of operation than the effect button 161B, the player is more likely to get excited when operating the effect lever 161L according to the elapse of the effective period of the operation. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

(Variable production example 5)
48-1 and 48-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48-1 and 48-2.
In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned effects will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned variable effects may be omitted.

First, in the variation effect example 5, the gaming state is the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and the variable pedestal and the hold number display 55 are displayed in a display mode different from the low-probability time-saving non-game state (see, for example, FIG. 43).
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the electric tulip 123 is arranged on the right side in the gaming area 111. Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving game state, a right-handed image 542 is displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 in order to instruct the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. To.

As shown in FIG. 48-1 (1), the decorative symbol 61 (“777”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 61 displayed at this time corresponds to a sequence of numbers that are finally confirmed and stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. And the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "777" like the decorative symbol 61.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (2), the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (3), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "5" which is the left decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "5" which is the right decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped to bring it into the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (4), the lever fanning front stage image 536 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (5), the latter stage image 537 of the lever fanning is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (6), a lever operation effect is performed. During the execution of this lever operation effect, the lever operation image 538 is displayed. Further, at this time, the effect operating device 161 changes from the non-projecting state to the protruding state, and the player can operate the effect lever 161L.

Then, when the player operates the effect lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is displayed, the accessory effect is performed as shown in FIG. 48-1 (7). In the illustrated example, the movable accessory 115 arranged in the center of the three movable accessory 115 covers a part of the image display unit 114 as the accessory effect. Further, at this time, the effect operating device 161 changes from the protruding state to the non-projecting state, and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (8), the decorative symbol 61 of the Zoro eyes is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, by displaying the decorative symbol 61 in the combination of "555", the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48-2 (9), the promotion fanning effect is performed. During the execution of this promotion fanning effect, the promotion fanning image 539 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-2 (10), a button operation effect is performed. While the button operation effect is being executed, the button operation image 531 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in the combination of "777" as shown in FIG. 48-2 (11). That is, it is promoted as a result of the promotion fanning production.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48-2 (12), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 61 is stopped as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. The combination of numbers "777" of the decorative symbol 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. In addition, "777" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 61 and the small symbol 56 are matched by the combination of "777".

As described above, the variation effect example 5 is a variation effect in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and the effect lever 161L is used in this variation effect. Further, the variation effect example 2 is a variation effect in a low probability time saving non-game state, and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variation effect. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variation effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, a variation effect pattern in the high-probability time-saving game state and a variation effect pattern in the low-probability time-saving non-game state are provided, respectively. Then, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used is selected is higher than in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution probability of the effect using the effect lever 161L is different between when the variation effect of the first mode is executed and when the variation effect of the second mode is executed. The first mode includes, for example, a low-probability time-saving non-game state, and the second mode includes, for example, a high-probability time-saving game state. In this case, the game control unit 200 is regarded as a mode control means capable of controlling the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode. Further, the first mode includes, for example, a normal effect mode, and the second mode includes, for example, a specific effect mode different from the normal effect mode, such as a zone. In this case, the effect control unit 300 is regarded as a mode control means capable of controlling the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode.
In this case, the effect is produced when the variable effect of the first mode is executed and when the variable effect of the second mode is executed, as compared with the case where the execution probability of the effect using the effect lever 161L is the same. The player's interest in the production in which the lever 161L is used increases. Therefore, the player gets excited when operating the effect lever 161L and becomes easy to violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player unintentionally touches a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. There is a risk that the effect lever 161L will be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Note that, for example, it may be easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L when the variation effect of the first mode is executed than when the variation effect of the second mode is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered when the variable effect of the first mode is executed.
Further, for example, it may be easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L when the variation effect of the second mode is executed than when the variation effect of the first mode is executed. In this case, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player when the variable effect of the second mode is executed.

Further, for example, the execution probability of the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used may be different for each scene (stage) on the effect. That is, the variation of the first stage means that the execution probability of the effect using the effect lever 161L differs between when the variation effect of the first mode is executed and when the variation effect of the second mode is executed. The execution probability of the effect using the effect lever 161L differs between when the effect is executed and when the variable effect of the second stage, which is in the same gaming state as the first stage but different from the first stage, is executed. It also includes that.

(Example of production setting)
Next, an example of setting the effect by the operation of the player will be described. In the following description, as shown in FIG. 40, the effect lever 161L is provided as a separate body from the effect button 161B, and the player can operate the effect lever 161L regardless of the progress of the game. And.
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of setting an effect operated by the player.

As shown in FIG. 49 (1), it is assumed that the highly decorative decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. At this time, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122 both indicate "0". Further, the menu display image 570 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The menu display image 570 is an image showing a method for displaying the menu screen. The menu screen is a screen on which the items of the effect that can be set by the operation of the operation means by the player are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "display the menu screen with the effect button" is displayed on the menu display image 570. Further, in the menu display image 570, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, the menu display image 570 indicates by text and a picture that the menu screen is displayed by the player operating the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates, for example, the effect lever 161L, the menu screen is not displayed. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 161B, the menu screen 571 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49 (2).
On the menu screen 571, a light amount adjustment item image 572, a volume adjustment item image 573, an effect explanation item image 574, a mode setting item image 575, and an end item image 576 are displayed. Further, the cursor image 577, the instruction method image 578, and the determination method image 579 are displayed on the menu screen 571.

The light amount adjustment item image 572 is an image showing the light amount adjustment item. The light amount adjustment item is an item for adjusting the light amount of various lamps.
The volume adjustment item image 573 is an image showing the volume adjustment item. The volume adjustment item is an item for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156.
The effect explanation item image 574 is an image showing the effect explanation item. The effect explanation item is an item for explaining the contents of various effects to the player.
The mode setting item image 575 is an image showing the effect mode setting item. The effect mode setting item is an item for setting the effect mode. The effect mode is, for example, a setting of a plurality of types of effects such as a setting of BGM flowing during execution of a variable effect in a low-probability time-saving non-game state and a setting of a background image displayed on the image display unit 114.

The end item image 576 is an image showing the end item. The end item is an item for hiding the menu screen 571.
The cursor image 577 is an image showing the designated item. In the illustrated example, the light amount adjustment item is indicated, and the cursor image 577 is associated with the light amount adjustment item image 572.

The instruction method image 578 is an image showing a method in which the player instructs each item shown on the menu screen 571. In the instruction method image 578, an image imitating the effect key 162 is shown in a manner in which the rear button 162a and the front button 162b of the effect key 162 (see FIG. 33) are painted in black. That is, the instruction method image 578 shows that the player can instruct each item shown on the menu screen 571 by operating the rear button 162a and the front button 162b of the effect key 162. Is indicated by.
The determination method image 579 is an image showing a method of determining the item of the instructed menu screen 571. In the determination method image 579, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, the determination method image 579 shows by the picture of the effect button 161B that the player can determine the item of the menu screen 571 by operating the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the front button 162b button of the effect key 162, the cursor image 577 is associated with the volume adjustment item image 573 and the volume adjustment item is instructed as shown in FIG. 49 (3). ..
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B, the volume adjustment screen 580 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49 (4). The volume adjustment screen 580 is a screen for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156. On the volume adjustment screen 580, a volume gauge image 581 showing the current volume, an adjustment method image 582 showing a method of adjusting the volume, and a determination method image 583 showing a method of determining the volume are displayed. There is.

The volume gauge image 581 shows the currently set volume level among the plurality of levels that can be output as the volume level. In the illustrated example, the currently set volume level is shown as 3 out of 5 levels.
The adjustment method image 582 is an image showing a method for the player to adjust the volume. The adjustment method image 582 shows an image imitating the effect key 162 in a manner in which the rear button 162a and the front button 162b of the effect key 162 are painted black. That is, the adjustment method image 582 shows that the player can adjust the volume by operating the rear button 162a and the front button 162b of the effect key 162 by the picture of the effect key 162.
The determination method image 583 is an image showing a method of determining the volume. In the determination method image 583, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, the determination method image 583 shows by the picture of the effect button 161B that the player can determine the volume by operating the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates, for example, the effect lever 161L, the volume level does not change. On the other hand, when the player operates the rear button 162a of the effect key 162, the volume gauge image 581 shows the magnitude of the volume as four of the five levels, as shown in FIG. 49 (5). .. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a notification sound called "pico" indicating that the volume has been adjusted. This notification sound is output according to the adjusted volume, that is, the volume of 4 out of 5 levels.

Here, when the player operates, for example, the effect lever 161L, the volume adjustment is not completed. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 161B, the volume adjustment completed image 584 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49 (6). The volume adjustment completed image 584 is an image showing that the volume adjustment is completed. In the illustrated example, the text "The volume has been adjusted" is displayed on the volume adjustment completed image 584.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (7), the menu screen 571 is displayed again. Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B in a state where the cursor image 577 is associated with the end item image 576 by operating the front button 162b of the effect key 162, as shown in FIG. 49 (8), The menu screen 571 is hidden.

Although not shown, the amount of light of various lamps can be adjusted by the same method as the method of adjusting the volume. That is, when the player operates the effect button 161B in the state where the cursor image 577 is associated with the light amount adjustment item image 572 on the menu screen 571 (see FIG. 49 (2)), a screen for adjusting the light amount is displayed. Is displayed. Then, with the screen for adjusting the amount of light displayed, the player adjusts the amount of light by operating the effect key 162, and then operates the effect button 161B to adjust the amount of light. Is completed. Even if the player operates the effect lever 161L while the screen for adjusting the light amount is displayed, the light amount is not adjusted and the light amount adjustment is not completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the menu screen 571 is not displayed even if the effect lever 161L is operated, and the menu screen 571 is displayed when the effect button 161B is operated. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a selected image in which any of a plurality of items can be selected. Then, the selected image is not displayed according to the operation of the effect lever 161L, and the selected image is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 161B.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L is not used to display the selected image, the player tends to be unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L, and the effect lever 161L tends to be operated violently. When the player violently operates the effect lever 161L, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the effect lever 161L during this operation. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, the volume is not changed by operating the effect lever 161L, and the volume is changed by operating the effect key 162 or the effect button 161B. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the setting related to the effect according to the operation of the effect key 162 and the effect button 161B without changing the setting related to the effect according to the operation of the effect lever 161L.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L is not used to change the setting related to the effect, the player tends to be unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L, and the effect lever 161L tends to be operated violently. When the player violently operates the effect lever 161L, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the effect lever 161L during this operation. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, the volume is not set even if the effect lever 161L is operated, and the volume is set by operating the effect key 162 or the effect button 161B. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 does not set the volume according to the operation of the effect lever 161L, but can set the volume according to the operation of the effect key 162 and the effect button 161B.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L is not used for setting the volume, the player tends to be unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L, and the effect lever 161L tends to be operated violently. When the player violently operates the effect lever 161L, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the effect lever 161L during this operation. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light amount is not set even if the effect lever 161L is operated, and the light amount is set by operating the effect key 162 or the effect button 161B. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 does not set the light amount according to the operation of the effect lever 161L, but can set the light amount according to the operation of the effect key 162 and the effect button 161B.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L is not used for setting the amount of light, the player tends to be unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L, and the effect lever 161L tends to be operated violently. When the player violently operates the effect lever 161L, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the effect lever 161L during this operation. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the item is instructed according to the operation of the effect key 162, the item is determined according to the operation of the effect button 161B. On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (6) of the variable effect example 5, the effect lever 161L is used alone without being used together with other operating means different from the effect lever 161L. That is, while the effect button 161B is used together with other operation means different from the effect button 161B, the effect lever 161L is not used together with other operation means different from the effect lever 161L.
In this case, the player can easily operate the effect lever 161L in a state unfamiliar with the operation of the operating means. Therefore, the player may violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is a risk of On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with the operation of the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

The operating means used for adjusting the volume and the amount of light is not limited to the effect key 162 and the effect button 161B.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing other adjustment examples of volume and light intensity.
In FIG. 50 (1), a light amount adjustment image 585 in which the light amount can be adjusted and a volume adjustment image 586 in which the volume can be adjusted are displayed.

In the light amount adjustment image 585, among a plurality of stages that can be output as the amount of light amount, the currently set level of the amount of light amount is indicated by a gauge. In the illustrated example, the currently set magnitude of the amount of light is shown as 3 out of 5 steps. Further, the light amount adjustment image 585 shows a method of adjusting the light amount. In the illustrated example, the light amount adjustment image 585 shows an image imitating the light amount adjustment unit 166. That is, in the light amount adjustment image 585, it is shown by the picture of the light amount adjustment unit 166 that the player can adjust the light amount by operating the light amount adjustment unit 166.

In the volume adjustment image 586, among a plurality of steps that can be output as the volume level, the currently set level of the volume level is indicated by a gauge. In the illustrated example, the currently set volume level is shown as 4 out of 5 levels. Further, the volume adjustment image 586 shows a method of adjusting the volume. In the illustrated example, the volume adjustment image 586 shows an image imitating the volume adjustment unit 167. That is, the volume adjustment image 586 shows that the volume can be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment unit 167 by the picture of the volume adjustment unit 167.

Here, when the player operates, for example, the effect lever 161L, the display contents of the light amount adjustment image 585 and the volume adjustment image 586 do not change, and neither the light amount nor the volume is adjusted. On the other hand, when the player operates, for example, the increase button 166a of the light amount adjustment unit 166, as shown in FIG. 50 (2), the light amount adjustment image 585 shows the magnitude of the light amount in four of the five stages. Shown as. At this time, the amount of light of various lamps increases.

Next, when the player operates, for example, the decrease button 167b of the volume adjustment unit 167, as shown in FIG. 50 (3), the volume adjustment image 586 shows the volume in three stages of five stages. Shown. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a notification sound called "pico" indicating that the volume has been adjusted. This notification sound is output according to the adjusted volume, that is, the volume of 3 out of 5 levels.

In this way, the effect control unit 300 may be able to set the light amount according to the operation of the light amount adjusting unit 166. Further, the effect control unit 300 may be able to set the volume according to the operation of the volume adjustment unit 167. Further, the effect control unit 300 may be able to change the settings related to the effect according to the operation of the light amount adjusting unit 166 and the volume adjusting unit 167.

In the effect setting example shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the player can operate the effect button 161B, the effect key 162, the light amount adjusting unit 166, and the volume adjusting unit 167 at arbitrary timings. On the other hand, the operation of the effect lever 161L is limited to the period during which the operation of the effect lever 161L is effective, as shown in FIG. 47 (A). Further, when operating the effect lever 161L, the player is encouraged to operate the effect lever 161L by the lever operation image 538, for example, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (6).
In this case, the player can easily operate the effect lever 161L in a hurry. Therefore, the player may violently operate the effect lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. There is a risk of On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the warning sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 Can be used to call attention. Therefore, even when the player tries to operate the effect lever 161L in a hurry, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

(Transformation example of selected image)
Next, the selected image in the modified example will be described.
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a setting example of automatic operation.
As shown in FIG. 51 (1), the setting screen display image 587 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The setting screen display image 587 is an image showing a method of displaying the automatic operation setting screen. The automatic operation setting screen is a screen for the player to set the automatic operation. The automatic operation is a setting in which the effect control unit 300 performs an effect according to the operation of the effect lever 161L or the effect button 161B without the player operating the effect lever 161L or the effect button 161B. In the illustrated example, the text "Display the automatic operation setting screen with the effect button" is displayed on the setting screen display image 587. Further, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed on the setting screen display image 587. That is, the setting screen display image 587 indicates that the automatic operation setting screen is displayed by the player operating the effect button 161B by text and a picture.

Here, when the player operates, for example, the effect lever 161L, the automatic operation setting screen is not displayed. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 161B, the automatic operation setting screen 588 is displayed as shown in FIG. 51 (2). On the automatic operation setting screen 588, a content explanation unit 588a, a determination unit 588b, a negative unit 588c, a cursor image 588d, an instruction method image 588e, and a determination method image 588f are displayed.

Information for explaining the setting contents on the automatic operation setting screen 588 is displayed in the content explanation unit 588a. In the illustrated example, the text "The effect button and the effect lever are automatically operated" is displayed on the content explanation unit 588a.
The determination unit 588b is a button for enabling automatic operation.
The negative unit 588c is a button for disabling the automatic operation.
The cursor image 588d is an image showing the designated button among the determination unit 588b and the negative unit 588c. In the illustrated example, the negative section 588c is instructed, and the cursor image 588d is associated with the negative section 588c.

The instruction method image 588e is an image showing a method for the player to instruct the determination unit 588b or the negative unit 588c. In the instruction method image 588e, an image imitating the effect key 162 is shown in a manner in which the right button 162c and the left button 162d of the effect key 162 are painted in black. That is, the instruction method image 588e shows by the picture of the effect key 162 that the player can instruct the determination unit 588b or the negative unit 588c by operating the effect key 162.
The determination method image 588f is an image showing a method for the player to determine the valid or invalid setting of the automatic operation. In the determination method image 588f, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, the determination method image 588f shows by the picture of the effect button 161B that the player can determine whether the automatic operation is valid or invalid by operating the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates, for example, the effect lever 161L, the cursor image 588d does not move, and the setting of enabling or disabling the automatic operation is not determined. On the other hand, when the player operates the left button 162d of the effect key 162, the determination unit 588b is instructed and the cursor image 588d is associated with the determination unit 588b, as shown in FIG. 51 (3).
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), a setting completion image 588 g indicating that the setting for enabling the automatic operation has been determined is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Automatic operation has been set" is displayed on the setting completed image 588g.

In this way, the player may determine any item of the determination unit 588b and the negative unit 588c on the automatic operation setting screen 588. That is, the selected image in which any of a plurality of items can be selected includes an image in which any of a plurality of items related to one setting can be selected, such as the automatic operation setting screen 588.

(Modification example of production setting)
Next, a setting example of the effect in the modified example will be described.
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a setting example of the effect in the modified example.
As shown in FIG. 52 (1), when the jackpot is won, the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped on the image display unit 114 in combination with the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (2), the opening image 589 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The opening image 589 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. More specifically, the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" is displayed on the opening image 589 of the present embodiment. The opening image 589 has contents suggesting the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed. In the illustrated example, the opening image 589 is intended to suggest that the total number of rounds is eight and that the high-probability time-saving game state is reached after the jackpot game is completed. A right-handed image 542 is displayed on the image display unit 114.

Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), when the jackpot game is started, the round image 591 and the music selection image 590 are displayed on the image display unit 114.
The round image 591 is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the round currently being executed in the jackpot game. For example, in the round image 591, when the jackpot of eight rounds is won, the display is performed in order from "Round 1" to "Round 8".
The music selection image 590 is an image for selecting a music output from the speaker 156 during the jackpot game being executed. In the illustrated example, "music A" is selected in the music selection image 590.

Here, when the player operates, for example, the effect lever 161L, the music output from the speaker 156 is not changed. On the other hand, when the player operates the front button 162b of the effect key 162, the text of "music B" is displayed in the music selection image 590 as shown in FIG. 52 (4). At this time, "music B" is output from the speaker 156.

After that, as the jackpot game progresses, the character instruction image 592 is displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (5). The character instruction image 592 is an image for the player to instruct the character appearing in the production in the high-probability time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. In the character instruction image 592, a first character image 593, a second character image 594, an instruction method image 595, and a determination method image 596 are displayed.

The first character image 593 is an image in which the first character that can be instructed by the player is shown in the character instruction image 592.
The second character image 594 is an image in which the second character that can be instructed by the player is shown in the character instruction image 592. In the illustrated example, the first character image 593 is instructed, and the display size of the first character image 593 is larger than that of the second character image 594.

The instruction method image 595 is an image showing a method of instructing a character. In the instruction method image 595, an image imitating the effect key 162 is displayed in a manner in which the right button 162c and the left button 162d of the effect key 162 are painted black. That is, in the instruction method image 595, it is shown by the picture of the effect key 162 that the player can instruct the character by operating the right button 162c or the left button 162d of the effect key 162.
The determination method image 596 is an image showing a method of determining a character. In the determination method image 596, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, in the determination method image 596, the picture of the effect button 161B shows that the player can determine the character by operating the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates, for example, the effect lever 161L, the instructed character is not changed and the character is not determined. On the other hand, when the player operates the right button 162c of the effect key 162, the second character image 594 is instructed as shown in FIG. 52 (6), and the second character image 594 is more than the first character image 593. The display size becomes large.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), the first character image 593 is hidden and appears in the effect in the high-probability time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. The character to be used is determined as the second character.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can change the music output from the speaker 156 during the execution of the jackpot game by operating the effect key 162. In addition, the player can change the character that appears in the game state after the big hit game by operating the effect key 162 and the effect button 161B. That is, the fact that the setting related to the effect can be changed means that the setting related to the effect during the execution of the jackpot game can be changed, and the setting related to the effect in the high probability state such as the high probability time saving game state or the time saving state can be changed. It also includes that.
Further, the target for changing the setting related to the effect is not limited to the above-mentioned example. For example, it may be possible to change the setting of the frequency at which a specific effect is executed in the variable effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect lever 161L is not used during the execution of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect lever 161L may be used during the execution of the jackpot game. Even in this case, the effect lever 161L is not used except during the execution of the variable effect and the execution of the jackpot game. On the other hand, as described above, the effect button 161B is used even when the variable effect is being executed and the jackpot game is not being executed.

(Modified example of pseudo continuous production)
Next, a modified example of the pseudo continuous effect will be described.
In the present embodiment, it has been explained that the pseudo continuous effect is performed in the variable effect. Here, the pseudo continuous effect is not limited to the above example.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a modified example of the pseudo continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 53 (1), an upper movable accessory 115A is provided on the upper side of the image display unit 114 to perform various effects by operating on the game board 110. The upper movable accessory 115A is a frame-shaped member and has the shape of the upper half portion of the star. Further, on the lower side of the image display unit 114, a lower movable accessory 115B that performs various effects by operating on the game board 110 is provided. The lower movable accessory 115B is a frame-shaped member and has the shape of the lower half portion of the star. Further, after the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is started, the number "6" which is the left decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), the upper movable accessory 115A moves downward and the lower movable accessory 115B moves upward, and the upper movable accessory 115A and the upper movable accessory 115A are located on the front side of the image display unit 114. It comes into contact with the lower movable accessory 115B. The upper movable accessory 115A and the lower movable accessory 115B in contact with each other form a star shape. Further, at this time, an icon described as "NEXT" is displayed in the area of the image display unit 114 surrounded by the upper movable accessory 115A and the lower movable accessory 115B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (3), the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is restarted. At this time, the pseudo continuous number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since it is the second variation display, the pseudo continuous number image 533 includes an image of “x2”.
In this way, a pseudo continuous effect may be performed by combining the movable member that can be operated and the effect image.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing another modification (modification example 2) of the pseudo continuous effect.
As shown in FIG. 54 (1), the effect control unit 300 terminates the variation of the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 stops the decorative symbol 61 with high decorativeness. And. Further, at this time, two left decorative symbols 61 showing consecutive numbers (numbers "4" and "5" in the illustrated example) are displayed. Further, at this time, two intermediate decorative symbols 61 indicating consecutive numbers (in the illustrated example, the numbers "5" and "6") are displayed. Further, at this time, two right decorative symbols 61 indicating consecutive numbers (in the illustrated example, the numbers "6" and "7") are displayed. That is, a plurality of sets of the three decorative symbols 61 are displayed. Further, the three decorative symbols 61 of each set are displayed on a straight line extending horizontally.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (2), the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the numbers "5" and "6", which are the left decorative symbols 61, are temporarily stopped. Further, the numbers "4" and "5" which are the right decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (4), the numbers "5" and "6", which are the intermediate decorative symbols 61, are temporarily stopped. At this time, the three decorative symbols 61 of each set are displayed so as to be offset from the horizontal straight line. More specifically, in each set, the right decorative symbol 61 is displayed shifted downward from the left decorative symbol 61 and the middle decorative symbol 61. At this time, a line image 543 that crosses a set of three decorative symbols 61 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (5), the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is restarted. At this time, the pseudo continuous number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since it is the second variation display, the pseudo continuous number image 533 includes an image of “x2”.
In this way, a pseudo continuous effect may be performed in which the decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped at a position different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect is not performed.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing another modification (modification example 3) of the pseudo continuous effect.
As shown in FIG. 55 (1), the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is started. In addition, at this time, the character fanning effect is performed to incite whether or not the character character production is performed. In the accessory fanning effect, the movable accessory 115 operates on the upper side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (2), the character effect is performed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (3), the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is restarted. At this time, the pseudo continuous number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since it is the second variation display, the pseudo continuous number image 533 includes an image of “x2”. If the character effect (see FIG. 55 (2)) is not performed after the character fanning effect (see FIG. 55 (1)) is performed, the decorative symbol 61 is not re-variated.
In this way, a pseudo-continuous production using the character production may be performed.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing another modification (modification example 4) of the pseudo continuous effect.
As shown in FIG. 56 (1), the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (2), the number "6" which is the left decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "6" which is the right decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (3), the number "5", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 61, temporarily stops.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (4), the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is restarted.
As described above, the pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without displaying the icon (see FIG. 45-1 (6)) described as "NEXT" or displaying the pseudo-continuous number image 533.

In the pseudo-continuous effect according to any of the above-mentioned effect modes, the decorative symbol 61 may change again when none of the three decorative symbols 61 is temporarily stopped. Further, the decorative symbol 61 may be changed again when one of the three decorative symbols 61 is temporarily stopped, or two of the three decorative symbols 61 are provisionally. The decorative symbol 61 may change again when it is stopped. Further, the decorative symbol 61 may change again when all three decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped.

Further, in the pseudo continuous effect by any of the above-mentioned effect modes, the pseudo continuous number image 533 may be displayed or the pseudo continuous number image 533 may not be displayed after the decorative symbol 61 is re-variated.
Further, in the pseudo continuous effect by any of the above-mentioned effect modes, the pseudo continuous effect such as the icon described as "NEXT" (see FIG. 45-1 (6)) before the decorative symbol 61 starts re-variation. An effect image meaning that continuous effect is performed may or may not be displayed.
Further, the pseudo continuous effect is not limited to the above example. That is, the pseudo continuous effect may be any effect as long as the decorative symbol 61 re-variates after it starts to fluctuate, and any effect is performed from the start of the variation to the re-variation of the decorative symbol 61. May be good.

In the variation effect example of the present embodiment, the number of movable accessories 115 that move is one in both the case where the effect button 161B is operated and the case where the effect lever 161L is operated. Not limited to this. The number of movable accessories 115 to be moved may be two or more in both the case where the effect button 161B is operated and the case where the effect lever 161L is operated. Further, the number of movable accessories 115 to be moved may be larger when the effect lever 161L is operated than when the effect button 161B is operated. In this case, the movable accessory 115 that moves when the effect button 161B is operated may not move when the effect lever 161L is operated.

Further, the sticker provided on the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not limited to the caution sticker 41 (see FIG. 34 (A)) and the accessory caution sticker 43 (see FIG. 38 (B)). The pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with a spec sticker 73 (see FIG. 65) and a voltage sticker 87 (see FIG. 75), which will be described later in the second embodiment.
Further, the alerting means provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not limited to the above-mentioned example. The attention-calling means may be, for example, the attention-calling image 93 (see FIG. 85) described later in the second embodiment.

<Embodiment 2>
FIG. 57 is an overall view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment.
First, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment.
Here, in explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, various structures will be supplementarily explained. In the following description, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is referred to as a front surface, and the rear surface of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is referred to as a back surface.

The game board 110 of the second embodiment has a transparent game board 118 in which a game nail is embedded and forms a game area 111. The transparent game board 118 is made of a transparent resin material and is capable of transmitting visible light. Then, the transparent game board 118 of the second embodiment can show the structural parts arranged on the rear side of the transparent game board 118, such as the image display unit 114 and the movable accessory 115, through the transparent game board 118. It has become.
The game area 111 in the second embodiment is an area on the surface of the game board 110 through which the game ball can pass. The game ball in this case does not include the game ball that has been launched from the launching device 151p (see FIG. 61 described later) and then passed through the discharge port 117, and the game ball that has won various winning ports.

Further, a transparent cell 118C (see FIG. 77 described later) is attached to the surface of the transparent game board 118 of the present embodiment. The transparent cell 118C is formed in the form of a transparent sheet, and for example, a decoration 118d (see FIG. 77 described later) that serves as a motif (that is, a subject) of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment is applied to the transparent gaming plate 118.

The rail member 112 has an inner rail member 112a provided on the inner side and an outer rail member 112b provided on the outer side of the inner rail member 112a. Further, on the right side and the upper side of the outer rail member 112b, a return rubber 112G which is a cushioning member for receiving the right-handed game ball is arranged.

A predetermined motif is set in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment.
The model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment is "CR Pachinko Star 777-Dream Dome Performance-V3B". The motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is a star. Then, as shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko gaming machine 100 displays "CR Pachinko Star 777-Dream Dome Performance-", which is a part of the model name, on the image display unit 114.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko game machine 100 has a movable accessory 115 in which the character string "Star 777", which is a part of the model name, is decorated.
The movable accessory 115 is arranged on the front side of the image display unit 114 and on the rear side of the transparent game plate 118 in the front-rear direction. That is, the movable accessory 115 is arranged between the image display unit 114 and the transparent game board 118 in the front-rear direction.

The movable accessory 115 according to the second embodiment is movable in the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the second embodiment, the movable accessory 115 can be shifted between the standby position located on the upper side of the game board 110 and the appearance position located at the central portion of the game board 110.
Further, the movable accessory 115 has an accessory light emitting unit 115L. The accessory light emitting unit 115L is capable of shining in any one of a plurality of luminescent colors by shining red light, green light, and blue light individually or in combination. It has become.

Further, the game frame 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment will be described in detail.
FIG. 58 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment is provided on the upper side of the game frame 150 and has an upper protruding portion 150P that projects toward the front side, which is the player side.
Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the upper accessory 5 of the second embodiment is provided on the upper protruding portion 150P. The upper accessory 5 has a non-protruding state housed inside the upper protruding portion 150P as shown in FIG. 58 (A) and a protruding state protruding from the upper protruding portion 150P as shown in FIG. 58 (B). It is possible to take one of the states in between.

The upper accessory 5 is provided with, for example, a shape or decoration that serves as a motif for the pachinko gaming machine 100. Further, the upper accessory 5 is provided with a light emitting lamp (not shown). Then, the light emitting lamp of the upper accessory 5 emits light together with other light emitting lamps of the game board 110 and the game frame 150, so that a predetermined effect can be executed.
Further, the game frame 150 is provided on the upper protruding portion 150P, and when the upper accessory 5 is in the protruding state, the upper accessory 5 is operated by the player to shift the upper accessory 5 to the non-projecting state. It has a storage button (not shown). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment, the upper accessory 5 is an object of operation by the player, and the storage button serves as a receiving means for receiving the operation.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of the game frame 150 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 59, the game frame 150 includes an inner frame 150U that holds the game board 110, a glass door frame 150G that holds a glass plate 119 that is a transparent member that separates the game board 110 from the player, and an inner frame. It has an outer frame 150S that holds 150U and a glass door frame 150G.

The outer frame 150S is a frame body that is the outermost outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The inner frame 150U is rotatably connected to the outer frame 150S. Further, the glass door frame 150G is rotatably connected to the inner frame 150U.

In the following description, the state in which the glass door frame 150G and the inner frame 150U are combined is referred to as a state in which the glass door frame 150G is closed, and a state in which the glass door frame 150G and the inner frame 150U are separated from each other. It is called the state where the glass door frame 150G is open. Further, the state in which the inner frame 150U and the outer frame 150S are combined is called a state in which the inner frame 150U is closed, and the state in which the inner frame 150U and the outer frame 150S are separated is called a state in which the inner frame 150U is open. Call.

Subsequently, the first starting port 121 provided in the game board 110 of the second embodiment will be described in detail.
FIG. 60 is an explanatory view of the first starting port unit 20 provided with the first starting port 121 of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (A) and 60 (B), the pachinko game machine 100 of the second embodiment has a first start port unit 20 including a first start port 121. The first starting port unit 20 includes a first starting port 121, a first starting port switch 211, a decorative main body portion 22, a decorative sticker 23 for decorating the decorative main body portion 22, and a light emitting unit 24 that emits light. doing.

The decorative main body 22 is made of a transparent material that transmits visible light. In the second embodiment, the decorative main body 22 can transmit the light of the light emitting unit 24 and show the light of the light emitting unit 24 to the player through the decorative main body 22. Further, the decorative main body portion 22 of the second embodiment has a portion to be attached R22 at a portion to which the decorative sticker 23 is attached. The attachment portion R22 is recessed more than other regions. Further, the attachment portion R22 of the second embodiment has a positioning portion r22 for positioning the attachment position of the decorative sticker 23. The positioning portion r22 protrudes from the attachment portion R22. Further, the positioning portion r22 has a shape corresponding to the slit portion 23K (described later) provided in the decorative sticker 23.

The decorative sticker 23 has a circular shape as a whole. The decorative sticker 23 is provided in the vicinity of the light emitting unit 24. The decorative sticker 23 is the sticker closest to the light emitting unit 24 among the various decorative stickers provided on the pachinko gaming machine 100. The decorative sticker 23 is decorated on one side and provided with an adhesive on the opposite side for sticking to the object. Further, the decorative sticker 23 of the second embodiment has a star pattern as a decoration corresponding to the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The decorative sticker 23 is made transparent so as to transmit visible light. Then, in the second embodiment, the decorative sticker 23 transmits the light of the light emitting unit 24, and the light of the light emitting unit 24 can be shown to the player through the decorative sticker 23.
Further, the decorative sticker 23 has a slit portion 23K that is partially cut from the end portion toward the center portion. The slit portion 23K of the decorative sticker 23 is formed so that the positioning portion r22 is fitted when the decorative sticker 23 is attached to the attached portion R22.

The light emitting unit 24 has an LED 241 and a substrate 242 on which the LED 241 is mounted. The LED 241 is configured to include a red element that emits red light, a green element that emits green light, and a blue element that emits blue light. Then, the LED 241 can shine in any one of a plurality of emission colors by shining red light, green light, and blue light individually or in combination of a plurality of colors. There is. For example, the LED 241 emits light in various colors such as white, blue, green, red, and purple. Further, the substrate 242 is electrically connected to the lamp control unit 320 (see FIG. 4). Then, the substrate 242 causes the LED 241 to emit light based on the current received from the lamp control unit 320.
Then, as shown in FIG. 60B, the light emitting portion 24 is arranged behind the decorative sticker 23 in the front-rear direction. Then, the light emitting unit 24 irradiates the player with light from the game board 110 side. As a result, the light emitting unit 24 illuminates the decorative sticker 23 and the decorative main body 22 provided on the front side from the rear side in the front-rear direction.
Further, in the second embodiment, the light emitting unit 24 is provided in the vicinity of the first starting port 121. The light emitting unit 24 is the light emitting unit having the shortest distance from the first starting port 121 among various light emitting units provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60C, the player tells the player that the first starting port unit 20 of the present embodiment emits light from the light emitting unit 24, thereby causing the decorative main body 22 and the decorative sticker 23 to emit light. You can see it.

The first starting port unit 20 of the present embodiment expresses the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100 by the decorative sticker 23, but the present invention is not limited to this aspect. For example, the shape of the first starting port unit 20 itself may express the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100. When the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a star as in the second embodiment, the decorative main body 22 itself may have a star shape. Further, in the second embodiment, the decorative main body portion 22 is decorated with the decorative sticker 23, but the decorative main body portion 22 is configured to be decorated by printing directly on the decorative main body portion 22 or the like. You may.

Subsequently, the seals used in the present embodiment will be described.
Here, in the description of the present embodiment, the seal is a paper or plastic film provided with information such as characters and figures on one side and an adhesive substance such as glue on the other side. .. Further, the sticker is attached to the object by the glue provided on the other side surface. Then, the sticker is attached to the surface of the object to attach information related to the object such as a name, contents, and number to the object, or to apply a design such as decoration to the object. The sticker may also be called a label or a sheet.
In the present embodiment, the characters include kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphanumeric characters and punctuation marks.

As shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a contact warning sticker 71 and an operation warning sticker 72 provided on the game frame 150, respectively. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a spec sticker 73, a display sticker 74, a light warning sticker 75, a fraud prevention alert sticker 76, a board number sticker 77, and a certificate stamp sticker 78, which are provided on the game board 110.

Here, the contact caution sticker 71 and the operation caution sticker 72 are provided on the surface of the game frame 150. Further, the spec sticker 73, the display sticker 74, the light warning sticker 75, the fraud prevention warning sticker 76, the board number sticker 77, and the certificate stamp sticker 78 are provided on the surface of the game board 110.
Then, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is used as the contact warning sticker 71, the operation warning sticker 72, the spec sticker 73, the display sticker 74, the light warning sticker 75, the fraud prevention warning sticker 76, the board number sticker 77 and the certificate stamp sticker 78. It is installed on the island of the hall, and the glass door frame 150G is closed, and all or at least a part of the glass door frame 150G is visible to the player or the manager.
In the second embodiment, the administrator can be an example of a clerk in a hall where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed, an employee of a company that manufactures or sells the pachinko gaming machine 100, or the like.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a pachinko gaming machine 100 in a state where the glass door frame 150G is open.
As shown in FIG. 61, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the following stickers are mainly visible to the administrator when the glass door frame 150G is open.
As shown in FIG. 61, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a frame warning sticker 79 provided on the gaming frame 150. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a board warning sticker 80 provided on the game board 110.

Here, the frame caution sticker 79 is provided on the surface of the game frame 150. Further, the board caution sticker 80 is provided on the surface of the game board 110.
When the glass door frame 150G is closed (see FIG. 57), the frame caution sticker 79 and the board caution sticker 80 are invisible or difficult for the administrator or the player to see.

FIG. 62 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is viewed from the rear side.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko game machine 100 has a frame number seal 81, a handling caution seal 82, and a voltage seal 87, which are provided on the game frame 150, respectively. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a sub ROM sticker 83, a main board management sticker 84, a main board sticker 85, and a main ROM sticker 86, which are provided on the game board 110, respectively.

Here, the frame number sticker 81, the handling caution sticker 82, and the voltage sticker 87 are provided on the back surface of the game frame 150. Further, the sub ROM seal 83, the main board management sticker 84, the main board seal 85, and the main ROM seal 86 are provided on the back surface of the game board 110.
Then, as shown in FIG. 57, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed on the island of the hall and the inner frame 150U is closed, the frame number sticker 81, the handling caution sticker 82, the sub ROM sticker 83, and the main The board management sticker 84, the main board sticker 85, the main ROM sticker 86, and the voltage sticker 87 are invisible or difficult for the manager or the player to see.

Hereinafter, each of the above-mentioned seals will be specifically described.

(Contact warning sticker 71)
FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of the contact warning sticker 71 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 63A, the contact caution sticker 71 is attached to the surface of the game frame 150 and is attached to the upper side of the game frame 150 to call attention to the player's contact with the game frame 150. That is, the contact caution sticker 71 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The game frame 150 of the second embodiment includes an upper protruding portion 150P on the upper side of the game frame 150. Further, the game frame 150 of the second embodiment has an upper accessory 5 on its upper protruding portion 150P. Then, the contact caution sticker 71 is attached to the upper protruding portion 150P to prevent the player's head, for example, from coming into contact with the game frame 150, or the player comes into contact with the protruding upper accessory 5. Call attention to prevent this from happening.

As described above, the contact caution sticker 71 of the second embodiment is directly attached to the upper protrusion 150P, which is the object of the warning, to call attention to the upper protrusion 150P. Further, the contact caution sticker 71 of the second embodiment is provided in the vicinity of the upper accessory 5 which is the target of the alert, and alerts the upper accessory 5. The contact caution sticker 71 of the second embodiment has the shortest linear distance from the upper accessory 5 which is the target of the caution, as compared with other seals.

As shown in FIG. 63 (B), the contact caution sticker 71 of the second embodiment has a rectangular shape in outline. Further, the contact caution sticker 71 has a notched portion in which the shape of one of the four corners is different from the shape of the other corners. That is, the contact caution sticker 71 has a shape that is not point-symmetrical. Then, the contact caution sticker 71 is attached to the first sticking portion R1 provided on the game board 110.

The first attachment portion R1 of the present embodiment has a red color. Further, the first sticking portion R1 has a positioning portion r1 for positioning the contact caution sticker 71. The positioning portion r1 is a concave portion recessed from the periphery and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r1 corresponds to the contact caution sticker 71. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r1 is also different from the positioning portion of the attached portion to which another seal is attached.
Therefore, when the operator attaches the contact caution sticker 71 to the game frame 150, the contact location of the contact caution sticker 71 can be attached without mistake.

Further, as described above, the shape of the contact caution sticker 71 corresponds to the positioning portion r1 of the first sticking portion R1 and is not point-symmetrical. Therefore, when the operator performs the work of attaching the contact caution sticker 71 to the positioning portion r1, the contact caution sticker 71 can be attached in the correct direction.

The contact caution sticker 71 includes a character portion 711 that calls attention to the player regarding the game frame 150, a caution illustration 712 that is an illustration that calls attention, and a general warning mark portion 713 that indicates that it is a caution. It has a character portion 711, a caution illustration 712, and a frame line 714 surrounding the general warning mark portion 713. Further, the contact caution sticker 71 has a character portion 711, a caution illustration 712, a general warning mark portion 713, and a base portion 715 which is a portion other than the frame line 714.

The character portion 711 prevents the player from colliding with the upper protruding portion 150P of the game frame 150, such as "Be careful of the upper part of the frame and be careful of popping out", or the upper accessory 5 protrudes. The content is such that the player is prevented from coming into contact with the upper accessory 5 when the state is reached.
The characters used for the seal in this embodiment are in Gothic font. The sticker of the present embodiment uses a Gothic font with a relatively thick line so that the player or manager can easily see or notice it in order to draw attention to the player or manager.

Caution Illustration 712 simply represents the game frame 150 (upper protrusion 150P) and the upper accessory 5. Then, the caution illustration 712 expresses the alert to the player's contact with the game frame 150 and the upper accessory 5 by an illustration instead of text information.

The general warning mark unit 713 expresses by illustration that the contact caution sticker 71 itself calls attention to the player. The basic configuration of the general warning mark unit 713 is the same as that of the general warning mark unit 414 of the first embodiment.

The frame line 714 is provided along the outer circumference of the contact caution sticker 71. Thereby, for example, the contact caution sticker 71 is made to stand out by showing the boundary portion between the contact warning sticker 71 and the first sticking portion R1.

The base portion 715 makes the character portion 711, the caution illustration 712, and the general warning mark portion 713 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, the base portion 715 is black, the character portion 711 is white, the caution illustration 712 is white and yellow, the general warning mark portion 713 is yellow, and the frame line 714 is white. As described above, the contact caution sticker 71 enhances the contrast of brightness between the base portion 715 and the character portion 711 other than the base portion 715, the caution illustration 712, the general warning mark portion 713, and the frame line 714. Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 715 (black in this example) is different from the color of the first attachment portion R1 (red in this example). As a result, the contact caution sticker 71 itself is made conspicuous on the game frame 150.

(Operation warning sticker 72)
FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of the operation caution sticker 72 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 64 (A), the operation caution sticker 72 is the surface of the game frame 150 and is attached to the lower side of the game frame 150, and relates to the operation of the player with respect to the effect button 161 provided on the game frame 150. Call attention. That is, the operation caution sticker 72 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The game frame 150 of the present embodiment is provided with an effect lever 161L in the vicinity of the upper plate 153. The operation caution sticker 72 is provided in the vicinity of the effect lever 161L. Then, the operation caution sticker 72 calls attention to the player when the effect lever 161L moves, and cautions that a hand is caught in the effect lever 161L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the operation caution sticker 72 of the present embodiment is attached to the second sticking portion R2 provided on the game frame 150.

As shown in FIG. 64 (B), the operation caution sticker 72 has a character portion 721 that calls attention to the player regarding the game frame 150, a caution illustration 722 that calls attention, and a general warning indicating that it is a caution. It has a mark portion 723, a character portion 721, a caution illustration 722, and a frame line 724 surrounding the general warning mark portion 723. Further, the operation caution sticker 72 has a character portion 721, a caution illustration 722, a general warning mark portion 723, and a base portion 725 which is a portion other than the frame line 724.

For example, the character portion 721 is displayed with the text "Caution for pinching the hand by operating the effect lever", and the effect operation device 161 is changed from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32 (A)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32 (B)). ), The player is warned that he / she unintentionally touches the effect lever 161L. Further, when the text "Caution for popping out of the effect lever" is displayed on the character unit 721 and the effect operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32 (A)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32 (B)). Attention is given to the player unintentionally touching the effect lever 161L. Further, the character portion 721 is displayed with the text "Caution for the upper part of the frame to pop out", and the player unintentionally touches the upper part 5 when the upper part 5 moves upward. Call attention.

The basic configuration of the operation warning sticker 72 is the same as that of the warning sticker 41 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 34 and the like). In the second embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

(Spec sticker 73)
FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram of the spec seal 73 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 65 (A), the spec sticker 73 is the surface of the game board 110 and is attached to the upper side and the right side of the game board 110 to show the game specifications of the pachinko game machine 100. That is, the spec sticker 73 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The spec sticker 73 of the present embodiment is provided outside the game area 111. Further, the spec seal 73 is provided in the vicinity of the rail member 112. Here, when the game ball is launched by the launching device 151p (see FIG. 61), the game ball moves along the rail member 112. Therefore, by arranging the spec sticker 73 in the vicinity of the rail member 112, when the player launches the game ball, the player's line of sight is thrown at the spec sticker 73 arranged in the vicinity of the rail member 112. I am doing it.

Further, the spec seal 73 of the present embodiment is provided adjacent to the return rubber 112G. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, by hitting a jackpot, a right-handed hit is performed in which the player is advantageous by hitting the game ball into the right-hand area in the game area 111. Then, in this right-handed state, the game ball is launched so that the game ball collides with the return rubber 112G. As mentioned above, right-handed hitting is performed, for example, when a jackpot is won, and the player is concerned about the probability of winning the jackpot and the probability that the gaming state after the jackpot game will be, for example, a high probability time-saving gaming state. It's time to do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the spec seal 73 is provided in the vicinity of the return rubber 112G so that the player can easily confirm the game specifications.

The spec seal 73 is not limited to being provided in the vicinity of the return rubber 112G like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment. For example, the spec seal 73 may be provided on the upstream side of the rail member 112 on the launching device 151p side. Further, the spec seal 73 may be integrally configured with the display seal 74 described later. That is, the spec seal 73 may be provided in the vicinity of the display 130.

As shown in FIG. 65 (B), the spec seal 73 of the present embodiment has a trapezoidal shape. That is, the spec seal 73 has a shape that is not point-symmetrical. Then, the spec sticker 73 is attached to the third sticking portion R3 provided on the game board 110.

The third attachment portion R3 of the present embodiment is transparently configured. The third attachment portion R3 has a positioning portion r3 for positioning the spec seal 73. The positioning portion r3 is a concave portion recessed from the periphery, and the bottom is flat. The shape of the positioning portion r3 corresponds to the spec seal 73.
Therefore, when the operator attaches the spec sticker 73 to the game board 110, the operator can attach the spec sticker 73 without making a mistake in the sticking location and the sticking direction.

The spec sticker 73 is a sticker containing information indicating the game specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The spec sticker 73 has jackpot probability information 731, prize ball number information 732, and probability variation inrush rate information 733 as an example of the game specification. Further, the spec sticker 73 has manufacturer information 734, model name 735, and version display 736. Further, the spec sticker 73 has a base portion 737 which is a part other than the jackpot probability information 731, the prize ball number information 732, the probability variation inrush rate information 733, the manufacturer information 734, the model name 735, and the version display 736.

The jackpot probability information 731 includes characters (numbers) indicating the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the low probability state.
The prize ball number information 732 includes characters (numbers) indicating the number of prize balls when a game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the second starting port 122, the large winning opening 125, and the normal winning opening 126, respectively.
The probability variation inrush rate information 733 includes characters (numbers) indicating the probability that the type of jackpot that will be in the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is selected.
The manufacturer information 734 includes characters indicating a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 100.
The model name 735 indicates the official model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in characters. In the present embodiment, the model name 735 displays "CR Pachinko Star 777-Dream Dome Performance-V3B".

The version display 736 is information indicating which version of the plurality of versions of the configuration of the gaming area 111 (hereinafter, referred to as the board configuration) provided on the surface of the gaming board 110 of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The version information of this embodiment is displayed in a predetermined color defined for each of a plurality of versions. The version display 736 of this embodiment is drawn, for example, by an orange circle.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a game nail in a game area 111 provided on the surface of the game board 110, a board surface configuration of a first starting port 121, a second starting port 122, a large winning opening 125, and a normal winning opening 126. The playability of the pachinko gaming machine 100 as a whole is determined by matching the winning probability of the jackpot lottery and the game specifications such as the number of prize balls. Then, for example, at the time of development of the pachinko gaming machine 100, a plurality of variations of the combination of the board surface configuration and the game specifications are prepared, and finally, one of the versions is determined. Therefore, it is necessary that the version of the board configuration and the version of the game specification correspond to each other. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the version display 736 is provided on the spec sticker 73 so that the version of the game board 110 can be confirmed at least on the surface of the game board 110.

The base portion 737 makes the jackpot probability information 731, the prize ball number information 732, the probability variation inrush rate information 733, the manufacturer information 734, the model name 735, and the version display 736 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, in the spec sticker 73 of the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 737 is black, and the jackpot probability information 731, the prize ball number information 732, the probability variation inrush rate information 733, the manufacturer information 734, and the model name 735 are displayed in white. , The version display 736 is displayed in orange. As described above, the spec sticker 73 includes the base portion 737, the jackpot probability information 731 other than the base portion 737, the prize ball number information 732, the probability variation inrush rate information 733, the manufacturer information 734, the model name 735, and the version display 736. The contrast of lightness is strengthened.

In this embodiment, the color of the base portion 737 is different from the color of the third attachment portion R3. And, the existence of the spec sticker 73 is made to stand out. However, for example, from the viewpoint that the sticker does not have to be as conspicuous as the sticker for calling attention, the color of the base portion 737 of the spec sticker 73 may be the same color as that of the third sticker portion R3.

(Display sticker 74)
FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the display sticker 74 of the second embodiment.
The display sticker 74 of the present embodiment is attached to the surface of the game board 110 on the left side and the lower side of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57), and displays an explanation regarding the types of a plurality of LEDs used as the display device 130. To do. That is, the display sticker 74 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The game board 110 of the second embodiment includes a display 130 on the outside of the rail member 112 (see FIG. 57). The display sticker 74 is provided on the display 130.
As shown in FIG. 66, the display sticker 74 has a rectangular shape in outline. Further, the display sticker 74 has a notch portion in which the shape of one of the four corner portions is different from the shape of the other corner portions. That is, the display sticker 74 does not have a point-symmetrical shape. Then, the display sticker 74 is attached to the fourth sticking portion R4 provided at the position of the display 130.

The fourth attachment portion R4 of the present embodiment is black. Further, the fourth sticking portion R4 has a positioning portion r4 for positioning the display sticker 74. The positioning portion r4 is a concave portion recessed from the periphery and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r4 corresponds to the display sticker 74. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r4 is also different from the positioning portion of the attached portion to which another seal is attached.
Therefore, when the operator attaches the display sticker 74 to the game board 110, the operator can attach the display sticker 74 without making a mistake in the sticking location and the sticking direction.

The display sticker 74 is a display (first special symbol hold indicator 218, second special symbol hold indicator 219, ordinary symbol hold indicator 220, first special symbol display 221 and first) that constitute the display 130. 2 This is a sticker that allows the player to distinguish the special symbol display 222, the normal symbol display 223, the status display 224, and the round number display 225). For example, the display seal 74 has a transparent window portion 741 that transmits the light of the LED of the display, a window frame line 742 that is provided so as to surround the window portion, and an explanatory portion 743 that explains the lighting mode of the LED. .. Further, the display sticker 74 has a base portion 744 which is a portion other than the transparent window portion 741, the window frame line 742, and the explanatory portion 743.

The transparent window portion 741 is provided for each of a plurality of LEDs constituting various indicators. The transparent window portion 741 is made colorless and transparent, and transmits the emitted light of the LED. The display sticker 74 of the present embodiment prevents the adhesive as a seal from being applied to the transparent window portion 741.
The window frame line 742 is a display (first special symbol hold indicator 218, second special symbol hold indicator 219, normal symbol hold indicator 220, first special symbol indicator 221 and second special symbol indicator 222. , Ordinary symbol display 223, status display 224, round number display 225), each composed of different colors. The window frame line 742 is, for example, red for the one corresponding to the first special symbol display 221 and blue for the one corresponding to the second special symbol display 222.

In the present embodiment, the explanation unit 743 specifically describes the relationship between the lighting mode of the round number display 225 and the number of operating rounds of the jackpot game. For example, the explanation unit 743 specifically displays the lighting mode of the LED for each number of operation rounds (2R, 4R, 8R, and 15R).
The base portion 744 makes the window frame line 742 stand out so that the player can easily see the window frame line 742. For example, in the display sticker 74 of the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 744 is black.

(Light alert sticker 75)
FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram of the light warning sticker 75, the fraud prevention warning sticker 76, and the board number sticker 77 of the second embodiment.
The light alert sticker 75 is the surface of the game board 110 and is attached to the left side and the lower side of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57), and the light emitting lamp provided on the game frame 150 and the light emitting lamp provided on the game board 110. Call the player's attention to the light. That is, the light alert sticker 75 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment has a light emitting unit 24 (see FIG. 60) of the first starting port unit 20 and a character light emitting unit 115L (see FIG. 57) of the movable accessory 115 on the game board 110. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment has a frame lamp 157 (see FIG. 57) in the gaming frame 150. In the following description, the light emitting unit 24, the accessory light emitting unit 115L, and the frame lamp 157 may be collectively referred to as a “light emitting lamp”.
Then, the light warning sticker 75 is attached to the game board 110 to call attention to the light of the light emitting lamps provided on the game board 110 and the game frame 150. In particular, the light alert sticker 75 of the present embodiment is arranged between the light emitting unit 24, the accessory light emitting unit 115L, and the frame lamp 157 in the board surface direction of the game board 110. As described above, the light warning sticker 75 is arranged between the plurality of light emitting lamps in the board surface direction of the game board 110, so that the player can easily pay attention to the light warning sticker 75.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the light alert seal 75 of the present embodiment is on the rear side of the transparent game plate 118 of the game board 110, and is the inner rail member 112a and the outer rail member 112b (FIG. 57). It is provided at a position opposite to (see). The game ball launched by the player first moves along the rail member 112. Therefore, the rail member 112 is an area that is easy for the player to pay attention to. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by arranging the light warning sticker 75 on the rail member 112, the player can easily pay attention to the light warning sticker 75.

As shown in FIG. 67 (B), the light alert seal 75 has a diamond-shaped outline. Further, in the light alert seal 75, the shape of one of the four corners is a notch unlike the shape of the other corners. That is, the light alert sticker 75 has a shape that is not point-symmetrical. Then, the light alert sticker 75 is attached to the fifth sticking portion R5 provided on the game board 110.

The fifth attachment portion R5 of the present embodiment has a black color and is made of a material that does not easily transmit light. The pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment can show the light of the light emitting lamp arranged on the rear side of the transparent gaming plate 118, for example, through the transparent gaming plate 118. Therefore, the fifth sticking portion R5 makes it difficult for the light to pass through so that the light warning sticker 75 for calling attention is not difficult to see due to the light of the light emitting lamp.

Further, the fifth sticking portion R5 has a positioning portion r5 for positioning the light alert seal 75. The positioning portion r5 is a concave portion recessed from the periphery and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r5 corresponds to the light warning sticker 75. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r5 is different from that of the positioning portion of the attached portion to which another seal is attached.
Therefore, when the operator attaches the light warning sticker 75 to the game board 110, the worker can attach the light warning sticker 75 without making a mistake in the sticking location and the sticking direction.

The light alert sticker 75 is a frame line that surrounds a character portion 751 that alerts the player regarding light, a general warning mark portion 752 that indicates that it is an alert, and a character portion 751 and a general warning mark portion 752. It has 753. Further, the light alert sticker 75 has a base portion 754 which is a portion other than the character portion 751, the general warning mark portion 752, and the frame line 753.

The character unit 751 allows the player to watch the light of the light emitting lamp provided on the game board 110 or the light of the light emitting lamp provided on the game frame 150 for a long time, such as "Please do not stare at the same light for a long time". It is a content that calls attention not to continue. That is, the character unit 751 mainly indicates information directed to the player.

The general warning mark unit 752 is the same as the general warning mark unit 414 of the first embodiment.
Further, the frame line 753 is provided along the outer circumference of the light alert seal 75. As a result, for example, the light warning sticker 75 is made to stand out by showing the boundary portion between the light warning sticker 75 and the fifth sticking portion R5.

The base portion 754 makes the character portion 751 and the general warning mark portion 752 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, in the light alert sticker 75 of the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 754 is white, the character portion 751 is displayed in black, the general warning mark portion 752 is displayed in yellow and black, and the frame line 753 is displayed in black. it's shown. In this way, the light alert sticker 75 enhances the contrast of brightness between the base portion 754, the character portion 751 other than the base portion 754, the general warning mark portion 752, and the frame line 753. Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 754 is different from the colors around the fifth attachment portion R5 and the fifth attachment portion R5. As a result, the light alert sticker 75 is made to stand out on the game board 110.

The light alert sticker 75 configured as described above is arranged so as to have the following relationship with respect to the distance to the player who sits on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and plays the game. As described above, the light warning sticker 75 calls attention to the light of the light emitting unit 24, for example. Here, for example, if the distance between the light emitting unit 24 and the light emitting unit 24 is exactly the same for the player, it is difficult for the player to recognize the priority order between the light emitting unit 24 and the light emitting unit 24. Become. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, the distance between the light warning sticker 75 and the light emitting unit 24 is determined based on the glass plate 119. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the distance between the light alert seal 75 and the glass plate 119 in the front-rear direction and the distance between the light emitting portion 24 and the glass plate 119 in the front-rear direction are different.

For example, the distance between the glass plate 119 from the front side to the rear side and the light alert seal 75 is made longer than the distance between the glass plate 119 from the front side to the rear side and the light emitting unit 24. As a result, the distance between the light alert sticker 75 and the player becomes longer than the distance between the light emitting unit 24 and the player. As a result, the light alert sticker 75 can be made at least less noticeable than the light emitting unit 24. Since the light alert sticker 75 has a characteristic of alerting the player, there is a risk that the player will be excited. Therefore, as described above, by arranging the light alert sticker 75 at a position farther than the light emitting unit 24 for the player, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get excited.

On the other hand, for example, the distance between the glass plate 119 from the front side to the rear side and the light alert seal 75 is made shorter than the distance between the glass plate 119 and the light emitting portion 24 from the front side to the rear side. As a result, the distance between the light alert sticker 75 and the player becomes shorter than the distance between the light emitting unit 24 and the player. As a result, the presence of the light alert sticker 75 can be easily noticed. For example, in the game board 110, there is no space for installing the light warning sticker 75, and there is a case where the warning sticker 75 must be provided in addition to the game board 110. In such a case, for example, the light warning sticker 75 is provided on the surface of the game frame 150 at a position closer to the player than the light emitting unit 24. This makes it easier for the player to notice the light alert sticker 75.

The light alert sticker 75 may be provided at a position closer to the display 130 than the light emitting unit 24, for example. The light alert sticker 75 alerts the player not to stare at the light emitting unit 24 for a long time, for example. Then, when the player stops staring at the light emitting unit 24 in accordance with the warning of the light warning sticker 75, the player may be confused as to where to look in the pachinko game machine 100 to play the game. Therefore, if the display 130 is provided at a position close to the light warning sticker 75, the display 130 is arranged near the light warning sticker 75 when the player sees the light warning sticker 75. You will be able to continue playing the game while referring to. Therefore, it is preferable that the light alert sticker 75 is provided at a position close to the display 130.

(Anti-fraud sticker 76)
The fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 is the surface of the game board 110 and is attached to the left side and the lower side of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57) to call attention to the player's fraudulent acts against the game board 110. That is, the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 displays information directed to the player.

The game board 110 of the second embodiment has a magnetic detection sensor in order to prevent the game ball from being illegally operated by using, for example, a magnet. The fraud prevention alert seal 76 is provided in the vicinity of the magnetic detection sensor. In the second embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor is provided, for example, on the rear side of the first starting port 121. The fraud prevention alert seal 76 is provided on the lower side of the rail member 112, which is closer to the first starting port 121. The game ball launched by the player first moves along the rail member 112. Therefore, the rail member 112 is an area that is easy for the player to pay attention to. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by arranging the fraud prevention alerting sticker 76 in the vicinity of the first starting port 121 on the rail member 112, the player can easily pay attention to the fraud prevention alerting sticker 76.

The fraud prevention alert sticker 76 may be attached, for example, to a position where the magnetic detection sensor is difficult for the player to see. For example, if the player can easily see the magnetic detection sensor, the player who legitimately plays the game may be more concerned about the existence of the magnetic detection sensor than necessary, and may not be able to enjoy the game. Therefore, for example, the magnetic detection sensor or the like may be configured to be provided at a position that is difficult to see by the fraud prevention alert sticker 76.

As shown in FIG. 67 (B), the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 has a diamond-shaped outline. Further, the fraud prevention alert seal 76 has a notched portion in which the shape of one of the four corners is different from the shape of the other corners. That is, the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 has a shape that is not point-symmetrical. Then, the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 is attached to the sixth sticking portion R6 provided on the game board 110.

The sixth attachment portion R6 has a black color and is made of a material that does not easily transmit light.
Further, the sixth sticking portion R6 has a positioning portion r6 for positioning the fraud prevention arousing sticker 76. The positioning portion r6 is a concave portion recessed from the periphery and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r6 corresponds to the fraud prevention arousing sticker 76. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r6 is different from that of the positioning portion of the attached portion to which another seal is attached.
Therefore, when the worker attaches the fraud prevention alert sticker 76 to the game board 110, the operator can attach the fraud prevention alert sticker 76 without making a mistake in the sticking location and the sticking direction.

The fraud prevention arousal seal 76 has a character portion 761 that calls attention to the player regarding the fraudulent game, and a frame line 762 that surrounds the character portion 761. Further, the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 has a base portion 763 which is a portion other than the character portion 761 and the frame line 762.

The character part 761 clearly indicates that a sensor capable of detecting fraud related to the game is provided, such as "equipped with a fraud detection sensor", and has contents to prevent fraudulent games from being performed. There is. That is, the character unit 761 indicates information directed to the player.
Further, the frame line 762 is provided along the outer circumference of the fraud prevention alerting sticker 76. As a result, for example, the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 is made to stand out by showing the boundary portion between the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 and the sixth sticking portion R6.

The base portion 763 makes the character portion 761 and the frame line 762 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, in the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 of the present embodiment, the base portion 763 is red, the character portion 761 is white, and the frame line 762 is white. As described above, the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 enhances the contrast of brightness between the base portion 763 and the character portion 761 and the frame line 762 other than the base portion 763.
Further, in the second embodiment, the color of the base portion 763 is different from the colors around the sixth attached portion R6 and the sixth attached portion R6. As a result, the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 is made to stand out on the game board 110.
Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 763 of the fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 is different from the color of the base portion of other seals. The fraud prevention arousal sticker 76 strongly impresses the player that it is a particularly important warning in the pachinko gaming machine 100 to prevent fraud in the game.

(Board number sticker 77)
The board number sticker 77 is the surface of the game board 110 and is affixed to the left side and the lower side of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57) to display information on management of the game board 110. That is, the board number sticker 77 displays information for the manager who manages the game board 110.

The board number sticker 77 is arranged on the rear side of the transparent game board 118 of the game board 110 at a position facing the inner rail member 112a and the outer rail member 112b. Then, the board number sticker 77 of this embodiment displays the model number assigned to the game board 110.

As shown in FIG. 67 (B), the board number sticker 77 of the present embodiment has a rectangular shape in outline. Then, the board number sticker 77 is attached to the seventh sticking portion R7 provided on the game board 110.
The seventh attachment portion R7 of the present embodiment is black. Further, the seventh sticking portion R7 has a positioning portion r7 for positioning the board number sticker 77. The positioning portion r7 is a concave portion recessed from the periphery, and the bottom is flat. The shape of the positioning portion r7 corresponds to the board number sticker 77. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r7 is different from that of the positioning portion of the attached portion to which another seal is attached.
Therefore, when the operator attaches the board number sticker 77 to the game board 110, the sticker can be attached to the board number sticker 77 without making a mistake.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the board number sticker 77 has a character unit 771 for managing the game board 110 and a code image 772. Further, the board number sticker 77 has a base portion 773 which is a portion other than the character portion 771 and the code image 772.

The character unit 771 is an alphanumeric character used to manage the game board 110, for example, "PL123456". Then, in the character unit 771 of the present embodiment, alphanumeric characters common to the game board 110 of the same model are used.
Further, the code image 772 is a coded version of the information corresponding to the character portion 771. In this example, the code image 772 is a coded version of "PL123456", which is the content of the character portion 771. Then, for example, the administrator can obtain the same information as the character unit 771 as electronic information by mechanically reading the code image 772 with a code reading device.

The base portion 773 makes the character portion 771 easy for the administrator to see, and makes the code image 772 easy to read by a reading device. For example, in the board number sticker 77 of the present embodiment, the base portion 773 is white, the character portion 771 is black, and the code image 772 is displayed in black.

(Certificate sticker 78)
FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of the certificate stamp sticker 78 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 68 (A), the certificate stamp sticker 78 is the surface of the game board 110 and is attached to the right side and the lower side of the game board 110 to display information on the management of the game board 110. That is, the certificate stamp sticker 78 displays information directed to the administrator.
Further, the certificate stamp sticker 78 is arranged outside the game area 111 (see FIG. 57) on the game board 110. Then, the certificate stamp sticker 78 displays a control number for uniquely identifying the game board 110.

As shown in FIG. 68 (B), the certificate stamp sticker 78 has a rectangular shape in outline. Further, the certificate stamp sticker 78 has notches in two of the four corners. As a result, the top and bottom of the certificate stamp sticker 78 can be distinguished by the shape without checking the characters. Then, the certificate stamp sticker 78 is attached to the eighth sticking portion R8 provided on the game board 110.
The eighth sticking portion R8 of the present embodiment is black. Further, the eighth sticking portion R8 has a positioning portion r8 for positioning the certificate stamp sticker 78. The positioning portion r8 is a concave portion recessed from the periphery and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r8 corresponds to the certificate stamp sticker 78. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r8 is different from that of the positioning portion of the attached portion to which another seal is attached.
Therefore, when the operator attaches the certificate stamp sticker 78 to the game board 110, the operator can attach the certificate stamp sticker 78 without making a mistake.

The certificate stamp sticker 78 of the present embodiment is issued by the association related to the game machine. Then, the management number 781, which is a management number, the union certificate 782, which is a proof issued by the union, and the manufacturer name 783, which indicates the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine, are displayed on the certificate stamp sticker 78. To.
The control number 781 is a unique number assigned to each game board 110 among the game boards 110 manufactured in a plurality of units. For example, the control number 781 of the certificate stamp sticker 78 is used to manage the entire game board 110. Further, the control number 781 of the certificate stamp sticker 78 is a control number provided for each of a plurality of components constituting the game board 110, such as the control number 841 (described later) provided on the game control board case 200c on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 100. It is used to manage a plurality of constituent parts constituting the game board 110 by associating with.

The certificate stamp sticker 78 of the present embodiment is configured to be most easily torn as compared with other stickers. Specifically, the certificate stamp sticker 78 is a relatively thin paper, and is attached to the eighth attachment portion R8 with a glue having a relatively high adhesiveness.
As described above, the certificate stamp sticker 78 is provided with a control number 781 unique to the game board 110. Therefore, for example, it is not preferable that the certificate stamp sticker 78 already attached to the game board 110 is peeled off and attached to another game board 110.
Therefore, the certificate stamp sticker 78 of the present embodiment is configured to be easily torn so that it cannot be used again even if it is peeled off, or the act of trying to peel it off is restrained.

(Frame caution sticker 79)
FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of the frame caution sticker 79 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 69A, the frame caution sticker 79 is attached to the surface of the game frame 150 and is attached to the lower side of the game frame 150 to display information on the handling of the game frame 150. That is, the frame caution sticker 79 displays information directed to the administrator.

In the present embodiment, the frame caution seal 79 is provided in the vicinity of the launching device 151p for launching the game ball. Then, the frame caution sticker 79 is attached in the vicinity of the launching device 151p to call attention to the launching device 151p.

The frame caution sticker 79 of the present embodiment has a rectangular shape in outline. Then, the frame caution seal 79 is attached to the ninth attachment portion R9 provided on the game frame 150.

The ninth attachment portion R9 of the present embodiment is black. Further, the ninth sticking portion R9 has a positioning portion r9 for positioning the frame caution sticker 79. The positioning portion r9 is a concave portion recessed from the periphery and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r9 corresponds to the frame caution sticker 79. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r9 is different from that of the positioning portion of the attached portion to which another seal is attached. Therefore, when the operator attaches the frame caution sticker 79 to the game frame 150, the operator can attach the frame caution sticker 79 without making a mistake.

Then, the frame caution sticker 79 of the present embodiment includes a character portion 791 regarding the handling of the game frame 150, a warning illustration 792 regarding the handling of the game frame 150, and a frame line 793 surrounding the character portion 791 and the warning illustration 792. Have. Further, the frame caution sticker 79 has a base portion 794 which is a portion other than the character portion 791, the warning illustration 792, and the frame line 793.

The character unit 791 specifically instructs the manager to handle the launching device 151p provided in the game frame 150, for example, "Do not touch the mallet tip. Do not clean the mallet tip."
Further, the warning illustration 792 shows an object to be instructed to handle. In this example, the warning illustration 792 represents a simplified image of the mallet tip of the launcher 151p, which is the object to be handled.
The frame line 793 is provided along the outer circumference of the frame caution sticker 79. As a result, for example, the frame caution sticker 79 is made to stand out by showing the boundary portion between the frame caution sticker 79 and the ninth sticking portion R9.

The base portion 794 makes the character portion 791, the warning illustration 792, and the frame line 793 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, in the frame caution sticker 79 of the present embodiment, the base portion 794 is displayed in yellow, the character portion 791 is displayed in red, the warning illustration 792 is displayed in black, and the frame line 793 is displayed in red. In this way, the frame caution sticker 79 enhances the contrast of brightness between the base portion 794, the character portion 791 other than the base portion 794, the warning illustration 792, and the frame line 793.
Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 794 is different from the colors around the ninth attachment portion R9 and the ninth attachment portion R9 (black in this example). As a result, the frame caution sticker 79 itself is made to stand out on the game frame 150.

(Board warning sticker 80)
FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram of the board caution sticker 80 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 70A, the board caution sticker 80 is the surface of the game board 110 and is attached to the right side and the upper side of the game board 110 to call attention to the handling of the game board 110. That is, the board caution sticker 80 displays information for the manager who manages the game board 110.

As shown in FIG. 70B, the board caution sticker 80 of the present embodiment has a rectangular shape in outline. Further, the board caution sticker 80 has a notched portion in which the shape of one of the four corners is different from the shape of the other corners. That is, the board caution sticker 80 has a shape that is not point-symmetrical. Then, the board caution sticker 80 is attached to the tenth sticking portion R10 provided on the game board 110.

The tenth sticking portion R10 is arranged outside the game area 111 in the game board 110. In the present embodiment, the tenth attachment portion R10 is arranged further outside the outer rail member 112b. Further, the tenth sticking portion R10 is provided in the vicinity of the holding portion 150H for holding the game board 110 in the inner frame 150U. Further, the tenth attachment portion R10 of the present embodiment is black.

Further, the tenth sticking portion R10 has a positioning portion r10 for positioning the board caution sticker 80. The positioning portion r10 is a concave portion recessed from the periphery and has a flat bottom. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r10 corresponds to the board caution sticker 80. As a result, when the operator attaches the board warning sticker 80 to the game board 110, the sticking position and the sticking direction of the board warning sticker 80 are not mistaken.

The board caution sticker 80 includes a first character portion 801 relating to the handling of the game board 110, a second character portion 802 relating to the handling of the game board 110, a general warning mark portion 803, and a first character portion 801. It has a second character portion 802 and a frame line 804 surrounding the general warning mark portion 803. Further, the board caution sticker 80 has a first character portion 801 and a second character portion 802, a general warning mark portion 803, and a base portion 805 which is a portion other than the frame line 804.

The first character portion 801 is a content that calls attention to handling when the game board 110 is attached / detached, for example, "the power is turned off when the game board is attached / detached".
The second character portion 802 is a content that calls attention to the handling regarding cleaning of the game board 110, for example, "Do not use detergent when cleaning the game board".
The general warning mark unit 803 is the same as the general warning mark unit 414 of the first embodiment.
The frame line 804 is provided along the outer circumference of the board caution sticker 80. As a result, for example, the boundary portion between the board warning sticker 80 and the tenth sticking portion R10 is clarified to make the board warning sticker 80 stand out.

The base portion 805 makes the first character portion 801 and the second character portion 802, the general warning mark portion 803, and the frame line 804 stand out so that the administrator can easily see them. For example, the base portion 805 of the present embodiment is displayed in white, the first character portion 801 is displayed in red, the second character portion 802 is displayed in black, and the frame line 804 is displayed in black. In this way, the board caution sticker 80 enhances the contrast of brightness between the base portion 805 and the first character portion 801 and the second character portion 802, the general warning mark portion 803, and the frame line 804 other than the base portion 805. ing.
Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 805 (white in this example) is different from the color of the tenth attachment portion R10 (black in this example). As a result, the board caution sticker 80 itself is made conspicuous on the game board 110.

Then, the frame caution sticker 79 and the board caution sticker 80 of the second embodiment display information for the administrator. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the glass door frame 150G is closed (see FIG. 57), the frame warning sticker 79 and the board warning sticker 80 are made difficult or invisible to the player. .. This prevents the frame warning sticker 79 and the board warning sticker 80 from being mistakenly recognized as information directed to the player.

(Frame number sticker 81)
FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram of the frame number sticker 81 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 71 (A), the frame number sticker 81 is attached to the back surface of the game frame 150 and is attached to the lower side of the game frame 150 to display information related to the management of the game frame 150. That is, the frame number sticker 81 displays information for the manager who manages the game frame 150.
Then, the frame number sticker 81 is attached to the eleventh sticking portion R11 provided on the game frame 150.

As shown in FIG. 71 (B), the eleventh sticking portion R11 includes a positioning portion r11 for positioning the frame number sticker 81 and a transparent cover c11 for covering the frame number sticker 81 attached to the positioning portion r11. ,have.
The positioning portion r11 is a concave portion recessed from the periphery and has a flat bottom. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r11 corresponds to the frame number sticker 81. As a result, when the worker attaches the frame number sticker 81 to the game frame 150, the sticking position and the sticking direction of the frame number sticker 81 are not mistaken.
The transparent cover c11 has a frame number sticker 81 so that the frame number sticker 81 attached to the game frame 150 does not come off or rub when work is performed, for example, when the pachinko game machine 100 is installed on the island of the hall. To protect.

The frame number sticker 81 has a character unit 811 for managing the game frame 150 and a code image 812. Further, the frame number sticker 81 has a base portion 813 which is a portion other than the character portion 811 and the code image 812.

The character portion 811 is an alphanumeric character used for managing the game frame 150, for example, "WK654321". The character unit 811 is a unique number assigned to each game frame 150 among the game frames 150 manufactured in a plurality of units. For example, the character unit 811 is used to manage the entire game frame 150.

Further, the code image 812 is a coded version of the information corresponding to the character portion 811. In this example, the code image 812 is a coded version of "WK654321", which is the content of the character portion 811.

The base portion 813 makes the character portion 811 easy for the administrator to see, and makes the code image 812 easy to read by a reading device. For example, in the frame number sticker 81 of the present embodiment, the base portion 813 is white, the character portion 811 is black, and the code image 812 is displayed in black.

(Handling caution sticker 82)
FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram of the handling caution sticker 82 of the second embodiment.
The handling caution sticker 82 is attached to the back surface of the game frame 150 and is attached to the lower side of the game frame 150 (see FIG. 71 (A)), and displays information on the handling of the game frame 150. That is, the handling caution sticker 82 displays information for the manager who manages the game frame 150.
Then, the handling caution sticker 82 is directly attached to the sheet metal 150K in the game frame 150, which is the object of the caution.

As shown in FIG. 72, the handling caution sticker 82 of the present embodiment surrounds the character portion 821 regarding the handling of the game frame 150, the warning illustration 822 regarding the handling of the game frame 150, and the character portion 821 and the warning illustration 822. It has a line 823 and. Further, the handling caution sticker 82 has a base portion 824 which is a portion other than the character portion 821, the warning illustration 822, and the frame line 823.

The character unit 821 specifically instructs the administrator to handle the sheet metal in the game frame 150, for example, "Be careful about the edge of the sheet metal".
Further, the warning illustration 822 displays the content of warning about touching the sheet metal by an illustration instead of a character.
The frame line 823 is provided along the outer circumference of the handling caution sticker 82. As a result, for example, by showing the boundary portion between the handling caution sticker 82 and the sheet metal 150K, the handling caution sticker 82 is made conspicuous.

The base portion 824 makes the character portion 821, the warning illustration 822, and the frame line 823 stand out so that the administrator can easily see them. For example, in the handling caution sticker 82 of the present embodiment, the base portion 824 is yellow, the character portion 821 is red, the warning illustration 822 is black, and the frame line 823 is displayed in red. In this way, the handling caution sticker 82 enhances the contrast of brightness between the base portion 824 and the character portion 821 other than the base portion 824, the warning illustration 822, and the frame line 823.
Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 824 is different from the color of the sheet metal 150K (for example, the metal color) which is the object of attention. As a result, the handling caution sticker 82 is made to stand out on the game frame 150.

(Sub ROM sticker 83)
FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram of the sub ROM seal 83 of the second embodiment.
The sub ROM sticker 83 is provided on the back surface of the game board 110. Then, the sub ROM sticker 83 is directly attached to the ROM 302 of the effect control unit 300 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 62).
As shown in FIG. 73, the sub ROM sticker 83 of the present embodiment has a quasi-model name 831 related to the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and a base portion 832 which is a portion other than the quasi-model name 831.
The quasi-model name 831 is displayed in characters in which the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is omitted or the model name can be inferred. For example, the model name of this pachinko gaming machine 100 is "CR Pachinko Star 777-Dream Dome Performance-V3B". On the other hand, the quasi-model name 831 is a simplified version of the model name, such as "Star 777 Dome".

As will be described later, the official model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed on the main ROM sticker 86. On the other hand, as described above, the omitted model name is displayed on the sub ROM sticker 83. Thereby, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko gaming machine 100, the ROM 302 to which the sub ROM sticker 83 is attached and the ROM 202 to which the main ROM sticker 86 is attached are distinguished from each other so that the operator does not make a mistake. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of the character color and the base portion color of the main ROM sticker 86 and the character color and the base portion color combination of the sub ROM sticker 83 are made to match. For example, when the color of the base portion of the main ROM sticker 86 is orange and the color of the characters is black, the color of the base portion of the sub ROM sticker 83 is orange and the color of the characters is black. As described above, the ROM 302 and the ROM 202 used for the same model can be distinguished from the ROMs of other different models by combining the same character color and the base color.

(Main board management sticker 84)
FIG. 74 is an explanatory view of the main board management sticker 84, the main board seal 85, and the main ROM seal 86 of the second embodiment.
The main board management sticker 84 is provided on the back surface of the game board 110 and is directly attached to the transparent game control board case 200c that houses the game control board 200B (see FIG. 62). The CPU 201, ROM 202 and RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) are mounted on the game control board 200B.

As shown in FIG. 74, the main board management sticker 84 has a control number 841 regarding a control number, a code image 842, and an opening information field 843 for writing information regarding opening.

The control number 841 is a unique number assigned to each game control board 200B among the game control boards 200B manufactured in a plurality of units. Alphanumeric characters are used for the control number 841, for example, "XX No. 123456".
The code image 842 is a coded version of the information corresponding to the control number 841. In this example, the code image 842 is a coded version of "XX No. 123456" which is the content of the control number 841.
The opening information column 843 is a column for the administrator who opened the game control board case 200c to enter a name and the like and an opening date.

The main board management seal 84 is composed of a transparent seal. Therefore, the administrator can visually recognize the game control board 200B behind the game control board 200B through the main board management sticker 84.
The control number 841, the code image 842, and the opening information field 843 are partially provided with a white base portion. The control number 841 is black, and the code image 842 is black.

Then, when the main board management sticker 84 of the present embodiment is peeled off from the game control board case 200c, it can be seen that the sticker has been peeled off. Specifically, when the main board management sticker 84 is peeled off from the game control board case 200c, for example, the characters "open" remain on the main board management sticker 84 itself and the game control board case 200c.

As described above, the main board management sticker 84 is provided with a control number 841 unique to the game control board 200B. Therefore, for example, it is not preferable that the main board management sticker 84 attached to the game control board case 200c is peeled off and attached to another game control board case 200c.
Therefore, the main board management sticker 84 of the present embodiment is configured so that a trace of peeling remains, so that even if it is peeled off, it cannot be used again or the act of trying to peel it off itself. I'm restraining.

(Main board seal 85)
The main board seal 85 is directly attached to the transparent game control board case 200c that accommodates the game control board 200B provided on the back surface of the game board 110.

The main board seal 85 has a model name 851, a maker name 852, an error display information 853, and an external terminal information 854.

The model name 851 displays the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the present embodiment, the model name 851 is displayed as "CR Pachinko Star 777-Dream Dome Performance-V3B". That is, in the main board seal 85, the model name 851 displays the official model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 without any simplification, for example.
The maker name 852 displays the name of the maker that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 100.
The error display information 853 clearly indicates the type of error when the LED that notifies the type of error emits light.
The external terminal information 854 indicates the relationship between the terminals in the external information terminal unit 900, which will be described later, and the contents of the signal output for each terminal.

The main board seal 85 is composed of a transparent seal. Therefore, the administrator can visually recognize the game control board 200B on the rear side through the main board seal 85. The model name 851, the manufacturer name 852, the error display information 853, and the external terminal information 854 are displayed in white.

(Main ROM sticker 86)
The main ROM sticker 86 is directly attached to the ROM 202 of the game control unit 200 provided on the back surface of the game board 110. That is, the main ROM sticker 86 shows information corresponding to the game specifications stored in the ROM 202 on the back surface of the game board 110.

The main ROM sticker 86 of the present embodiment has a model name 861 related to the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100, a maker name 862, and a base portion 863 which is a part other than the model name 861 and the maker name 862.
The model name 861 displays the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the present embodiment, the model name 861 displays "CR Pachinko Star 777-Dream Dome Performance-V3B". That is, in the main ROM sticker 86, the model name 861 displays the official model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 without any simplification or the like. The game specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are unique to each model. Therefore, the main ROM sticker 86 of the second embodiment displays information according to the game specifications stored in the ROM 202 by displaying the model name on the main ROM sticker 86.

Then, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, the official model name "CR Pachinko Star 777-Dream Dome Performance-V3B" is displayed even in the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73. That is, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is described on the spec sticker 73, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is also described on the main ROM sticker 86, and the model names of both are described in the same notation. There is.

The maker name 862 is the name of the maker that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 100.
The base portion 863 is orange in this embodiment. The color of the base portion 863 is the same as the color of the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 863 of the main ROM sticker 86 is the color of the version display 736, which is a portion other than the character portion of the spec sticker 73.
As a result, for example, the administrator can use the color of the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 provided on the front surface of the game board 110 and the color of the base portion 863 of the main ROM sticker 86 provided on the back surface of the game board 110. It can be easily visually confirmed that the game specifications match on the front and back of the 110.

For example, the color of the model name 861 (or the manufacturer name 862) of the main ROM sticker 86 may be the color used as the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73. Even in the case of such a configuration, for example, the administrator can use the color of the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 provided on the front surface of the game board 110 and the model name of the main ROM sticker 86 provided on the back surface of the game board 110. It can be easily visually confirmed that the game specifications match on the front and back of the game board 110 by the color of 861.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, other parts other than the character part of the spec sticker 73 (probability information 731, prize ball number information 732, probability variation inrush rate information 733, manufacturer information 734, model name 735). By using the color used for (version display 736) as the color of the base part (base part 863) or the character part (model name 861, manufacturer name 862) of the main ROM sticker 86, the game specifications can be obtained on the front and back of the game board 110. It is easy to confirm that they match.

Further, the area of the display area of the main ROM sticker 86 of the second embodiment is smaller than the area of the display area of the spec sticker 73. That is, the display area of the sticker is wider in the spec sticker 73 than in the main ROM sticker 86. In the present embodiment, the display area is all areas on the side where information such as a character portion is provided. For example, the display area on the seal is not the surface on which the adhesive is provided, but the surface on the opposite side where information is displayed.
In the second embodiment, for example, the area of the display area of the spec sticker 73 is about three times the area of the display area of the main ROM sticker 86 of the second embodiment.

For example, the spec sticker 73 is viewed by a player who has little expertise in the game machine. Therefore, by making the display area of the spec sticker 73 relatively large, it becomes easier for the player to check the contents. On the other hand, by making the display area of the main ROM sticker 86 relatively small, the position where the ROM 202 exists can be made inconspicuous. Then, for example, the ROM 202 can be configured so as to be difficult to find for a person who illegally exchanges the ROM 202.

Further, the character size of the model name 861 on the main ROM sticker 86 is smaller than the character size of the model name 735 on the spec sticker 73. That is, the character size of the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is larger in the spec sticker 73 than in the main ROM sticker 86.
In the spec sticker 73 of the second embodiment, the character size of the model name 735 is, for example, 10 pt. On the other hand, in the main ROM sticker 86 of the second embodiment, the character size of the model name 861 is, for example, 8 pt.

This makes it easier for the player to check, for example, by making the character size of the spec sticker 73 relatively large. On the other hand, by making the character size of the main ROM sticker 86 relatively small, for example, it is possible to configure the ROM 202 so that it is difficult for a person who illegally replaces the ROM 202 to find the ROM 202.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the area where the model name 861 of the main ROM sticker 86 occupies the entire display area of the main ROM sticker 86 is the area where the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 occupies the entire display area of the spec sticker 73. Higher than the ratio. That is, the ratio of the characters indicating the model name to the display area is higher in the main ROM sticker 86 than in the spec sticker 73.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the character size of the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 is larger than the character size of the model name 861 of the main ROM sticker 86. The area of the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 is about 1.5 times the area of the model name 861 of the main ROM sticker 86. Further, as described above, the area of the display area of the spec sticker 73 is about three times the area of the display area of the main ROM sticker 86. That is, in the second embodiment, the area ratio of the model name of the spec sticker 73 is not as high as the area ratio of the display area to the sub ROM seal 83.
Then, in the second embodiment, the ratio of the model name 861 to the display area of the main ROM sticker 86 is about 0.5, and the ratio of the model name 735 to the display area of the spec sticker 73 is about 1. As described above, in the second embodiment, the main ROM sticker 86 has a higher ratio of characters in the display area than the spec sticker 73.

For example, in addition to the model name 735, the spec sticker 73 needs to describe the jackpot probability information 731, the prize ball number information 732, the probability variation inrush rate information 733, and the like. Therefore, by making the ratio of the area occupied by the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 to the entire display area relatively low, it is possible to sufficiently secure the area for describing other information of the model name 735. On the other hand, the main ROM sticker 86 only needs to have the model name 861 at a minimum. Therefore, the ratio of the area where the model name 861 occupies the entire display area of the main ROM sticker 86 is increased, and the overall size is kept as small as possible.

(Voltage seal 87)
FIG. 75 is an explanatory view of the voltage seal 87 of the second embodiment.
The voltage sticker 87 is directly attached to the power cord 150D, which is the back surface of the game frame 150 and is provided on the upper side of the game frame 150. Then, the voltage sticker 87 calls attention to the handling of the power cord 150D of the game frame 150. That is, the voltage sticker 87 displays information for the manager who manages the game frame 150.

The voltage seal 87 is composed of a single sheet, and is attached to the power cord 150D by sandwiching the voltage seal 87 between the power cord 150D and sticking the adhesive surfaces (adhesive surfaces) to each other so as to face each other. In the present embodiment, the voltage seal 87 that evokes a particularly important warning is firmly attached to the power cord 150D by adhering the adhesive surfaces to each other.

The voltage sticker 87 has a rated voltage display 871, a character portion 872, and a warning illustration 873.
The rated voltage display 871 displays the rated voltage of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Specifically, the rated voltage display 871 displays a content such as "24 volt caution".
Further, the character portion 872 indicates a content of warning not to apply a voltage other than the rated voltage to the pachinko gaming machine 100. Specifically, the character part 872 calls attention to the handling of the power cord 150D, saying, "Do not put anything other than 24 volts because it may cause an accident."
The warning illustration 873 is an illustration of the content that warns that an accident may occur, for example.

(Modification example)
FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example 1 of the sticker relating to alerting.
As shown in FIG. 76 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the first modification has a transparent film 150F on the rear side of the glass door frame 150G. When the glass door frame 150G is closed, the transparent film 150F is sandwiched between the game board 110 and the glass door frame 150G. Then, in this state, at least a part of the transparent film 150F including the light alerting portion 75A described later is visible to the player through the glass plate 119.

The transparent film 150F has a light alerting unit 75A that calls attention to light.
In the first modification shown in FIG. 76 (B), the light alert portion 75A is provided between the inner rail member 112a and the outer rail member 112b (see FIG. 57).
Further, the light alert unit 75A has a character unit 75A1 that alerts the player regarding light, and a general warning mark portion 75A2 that indicates that the athlete is alert. Further, the light alert portion 75A has a base portion 75A3 which is a portion other than the character portion 75A1 and the general warning mark portion 75A2.

The base portion 75A3 makes the character portion 75A1 and the general warning mark portion 75A2 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, in the light alert portion 75A of the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 75A3 is yellow, the character portion 75A1 is displayed in black, and the general warning mark portion 75A2 is displayed in black. In this way, the light alerting unit 75A enhances the contrast of brightness between the base portion 75A3, the character portion 75A1 other than the base portion 75A3, and the general warning mark portion 75A2. Further, in the first modification, the color of the base portion 75A3 is different from the color of the surrounding members. As a result, the light alerting unit 75A itself is made conspicuous on the game board 110.

Further, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the pachinko game machine 100 of the first modification has a caution seal 89 on the glass door frame 150G of the game frame 150. Further, the caution sticker 89 is provided on the side surface of the glass door frame 150G. Then, the information for calling attention regarding the handling of the game frame 150 and the game board 110 is displayed. That is, the alert sticker 89 displays information directed to the administrator.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76C, the caution sticker 89 of the present embodiment has a character portion 891 regarding the handling of the game frame 150 and the game board 110, and a general warning mark portion 892. Further, the caution sticker 89 has a base portion 893 which is a portion other than the character portion 891 and the general warning mark portion 892.

The character part 891 says, "When opening and closing the door, make sure that the board surface gimmick is in the initial position before opening and closing." The movable accessory 115 on the game board 110 when opening and closing the glass door frame 150G. It is a content that calls attention to the handling of. That is, in this example, the caution sticker 89 provided on the game frame 150 calls attention to the game board 110.
The basic configuration of the general warning mark unit 892 is the same as that of the general warning mark unit 414 of the first embodiment.

The base portion 893 makes the character portion 891 and the general warning mark portion 892 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, the base portion 893 is black, the character portion 891 is white, and the general warning mark portion 892 is white and black.

As with the caution sticker 89, the following modes are also provided in the game frame 150 to call attention to the game board 110.
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with a decorative member that is separate from the gaming board 110 and is apparently provided in the gaming frame 150. However, the decorative member is removable from the game frame 150. Then, this decorative member is created based on the same motif as, for example, the game board 110. That is, the game board 110 and the decorative member are a set. Therefore, when the game board 110 is replaced with respect to the game frame 150, the decorative members are also replaced. In such a case, the decorative member is treated as a part of the game board 110, not the game frame 150.
Then, the decorative member may be provided with a caution sticker for alerting the player to the upper protrusion 150P of the game frame 150. In this case, the caution sticker is treated as being provided on the game board 110. Then, the caution sticker is provided on the game board 110 to call attention to the game frame 150.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example 2 of the sticker relating to alerting.
As shown in FIG. 77, the game board 110 of the present embodiment has a transparent game board 118 in which a game nail is embedded and a game area 111 is formed. The transparent cell 118C is entirely attached to the transparent game board 118. The transparent cell 118C is made of a transparent sheet, and an adhesive such as glue is applied to one side of the transparent cell 118C. Further, the transparent cell 118C has a decorative portion 118d for decorating the transparent game plate 118 and a caution portion 118k for calling attention to the player in at least a part of the transparent game plate 118.

The decoration unit 118d decorates, for example, a pattern, a figure, a character, etc., which is a motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 77, the alert portion 118k is provided in the vicinity of the inner rail member 112 and inside the inner rail member 112. The attention alerting unit 118k includes a light alerting unit K1 that calls attention to light, a fraud prevention alerting unit K2 that alerts attention to fraud, a contact alerting sticker K3 that alerts attention to contact, and cautions regarding operation. It has an operation caution unit K4 that arouses the above.

The light alerting unit K1 has a long player who uses the light of the light emitting lamp provided on the game board 110 or the light of the light emitting lamp provided on the game frame 150, such as "Please do not stare at the same light for a long time". It is a content that calls attention not to keep watching for a while. That is, the light alerting unit K1 mainly indicates information directed to the player.

The fraud prevention alerting unit K2 clearly states that a sensor capable of detecting fraud related to the game is provided, such as "equipped with a fraud detection sensor", and prevents fraudulent games from being performed. It has become. That is, the fraud prevention arousing unit K2 indicates information directed to the player.

The contact warning seal K3 prevents the player from colliding with the upper protruding portion 150P of the game frame 150, such as "Be careful of the upper part of the frame and be careful of popping out", or the upper accessory 5 The content is such that the player is prevented from coming into contact with the upper accessory 5 when the is in a protruding state. That is, the contact caution sticker K3 indicates information directed to the player.

The operation warning unit K4 has a content that prevents the player from operating the game frame 150 due to excessive force, such as "Do not operate with excessive force because there is a risk of damage". That is, the operation caution unit K4 indicates information directed to the player.

The light alerting unit K1, the fraud prevention alerting unit K2, the contact alerting sticker K3, and the operation alerting unit K4 are each drawn in black characters. Further, the base portion other than the character portion of the light alerting portion K1, the fraud prevention alerting portion K2, the contact alerting sticker K3, and the operation alerting portion K4 is displayed in white, for example.

In the second embodiment, for example, the light alert sticker 75 displays only the alert regarding the gaze of the light of the light emitting lamp, but the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, the light alert sticker 75 may display the contents described in the contact alert sticker 71, the operation alert sticker 72, and the fraud prevention alert sticker 76 in addition to the alert regarding the gaze of the light of the light emitting lamp. good. This also applies to the contact warning sticker 71, the operation warning sticker 72, and the fraud prevention warning sticker 76.

Further, in the second embodiment, the various seals are positioned by the positioning portion formed of the concave portion in the portion to be attached, but are not limited to the example of the concave portion. The various stickers may be attached to the attached portions (first convex portion 170, second convex portion 171, third convex portion 172, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 35 in the first embodiment.

FIG. 78 is an overall view of the external information terminal unit 900 in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an external information terminal unit 900 that receives an external information signal from the external information terminal board 340 for the frame and the external information terminal board 350 for the board (see FIG. 3). Then, by connecting the host computer installed in the hall and each terminal portion of the external information terminal portion 900 with a signal line, the host computer can acquire various external information.
Then, in the external information terminal portion 900 of the present embodiment, as various information, "prize ball", "door / frame opening", "design confirmation", "starting port", "big hit 1", "big hit 2" , "Big hit 3", "Main prize ball" and "Security" signals are transmitted from the frame external information terminal board 340 and the board external information terminal board 350.

Here, the "prize ball" is information transmitted from the payout control unit 330, and is information regarding the number of prize balls paid out. "Opening the door / frame" is information transmitted according to the opening / closing of the glass door frame 150G or the inner frame 150U. "Symbol confirmation" is information transmitted when the symbol change of the special symbol is fixed and stopped. The "starting port" is information transmitted when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122. "Big hit 1" is information transmitted as ON during a big hit game, for example. "Big hit 2" is information transmitted from the start of the big hit game to the end of the high-probability time-saving game state in the case of shifting to the high-probability time-saving game state after the big-hit game starts. .. "Big hit 3" is information transmitted from the start of the big hit game to the end of the low-probability time-saving game state in the case of shifting to the low-probability time-saving game state after the big-hit game starts. .. The "main prize ball" is information representing the number of prize balls counted as a payout schedule in the game control unit 200. "Security" is information transmitted when various errors occur.

The external information terminal unit 900 has a plurality of terminals (C1 to C9) for connecting signal lines in response to the various signals described above. Further, the plurality of terminals are divided into different colors according to the content of the signal. The relationship between these terminals and the signal is described in, for example, external terminal information 854 (see FIG. 74 (A)).
For example, the terminal C1 outputs a "prize ball" signal and is white. Terminal C2 outputs a signal of "door / frame open" and is green. The terminal C3 outputs a "design confirmation" signal and is gray. The terminal C4 outputs a signal of the "starting port" and is yellow. The terminal C5 outputs a signal of "big hit 1" and is black. The terminal C6 outputs a signal of "big hit 2" and has a pink color. The terminal C7 outputs a signal of "big hit 3" and is blue. The terminal C8 outputs a signal of the "main prize ball" and is colored orange. Terminal C9 outputs a "security" signal and is light blue.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, an external terminal sticker 88 that clearly indicates the existence of the external information terminal board 350 for the panel is provided in the vicinity of the external information terminal portion 900. In the present embodiment, the external terminal sticker 88 is attached to the holding member 900c that holds the external information terminal portion 900.
The external terminal sticker 88 has a character portion 881 and a frame line 882 surrounding the character portion 881. Further, the external terminal seal 88 has a base portion 883 which is a portion other than the character portion 881 and the frame line 882. The character unit 881 is a content that clearly indicates that it is an external information terminal unit 900, for example, "external terminal". Further, the frame wire 882 is provided along the outer circumference of the external terminal seal 88.
The base portion 883 is yellow. The character portion 881 is black. The border 882 is red.

In the external information terminal unit 900 configured as described above, the terminal C1 of the "prize ball" signal is white, and the terminal C5 of the "big hit 1" signal is black. That is, the colors of the signal terminals related to the ball ejection specifications in the pachinko gaming machine 100 are set to white and black. When adopting the color configuration of the terminals, black and white are used for the base portion and the character portion of the spec sticker 73. For example, when the base portion of the spec sticker 73 is white, the character portion of the spec sticker 73 is black. Further, for example, when the base portion of the spec sticker 73 is black, the character portion of the spec sticker 73 is white. Similarly, black and white are used for the base portion and the character portion of the main ROM sticker 86.

Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the color of the signal terminal related to the ball ejection specification, the color constituting the character portion and the base portion of the spec sticker 73, and the character portion of the main ROM sticker 86. By making the colors forming the base portion white and black, the administrator can easily manage the pachinko gaming machine 100. That is, the color constituting the spec sticker 73 provided on the front surface of the game board 110 and the color constituting the main ROM sticker 86 provided on the back surface of the game board 110 are the same, so that the front and back surfaces of the game board 110 are the same. It can be easily confirmed that the configuration and the game control board 200B correspond to each other. Further, in this example, after the administrator recognizes that white and black are important colors by the spec seal 73 and the main ROM seal 86, the important signal line related to the ball ejection specification is set to the external information terminal portion. When connecting to 900, the connection work can be performed while paying attention to white and black.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, "CN" is printed for each terminal on the substrate on which each terminal of the external information terminal portion 900 is mounted. In the second embodiment, CN + number is written for each terminal so that each terminal can be distinguished. The CN + character of the present embodiment is white. On the other hand, the external terminal information 854 that explains the external information terminal portion 900 in the main board seal 85 is composed of white characters. As a result, the external terminal information 854 of the main board seal 85 and the color of the "CN" printed on the external information terminal 900 correspond to each other, so that the external terminal information 854 relates to the explanation of the external information terminal 900. Is suggested.

Further, in the present embodiment, all the colors used in the main ROM sticker 86 and the spec sticker 73 are included in the colors of the external terminals.

However, if an important signal line color is used for the spec sticker 73 or the main ROM sticker 86 that the administrator pays attention to, there is a risk that the color will become familiar. In particular, signal lines related to door / frame opening and security are important in halls. Therefore, the color of the external terminal for opening the door / frame is not used for the character color or the base color of the spec sticker 73 or the main ROM sticker 86. Further, the color of the external terminal of the security is not used for the character color and the base color of the spec sticker 73 and the main ROM sticker 86.

Further, for example, the color of the character portion and the base portion of the spec sticker 73 and the main ROM sticker 86 may be composed of white and black. In such a case, in the external information terminal portion 900, the terminal (white) and the terminal (black) are not provided adjacent to each other. For example, in the spec sticker 73 and the main ROM sticker 86, information can be made easier to see by adjoining white and black to enhance the color contrast. However, due to the worker's awareness that the colors used for the spec sticker 73 and the main ROM sticker 86 are white and black, connect a black signal line next to the white terminal or connect a white signal line next to the black terminal. There is a risk of doing so. Therefore, in this example, the terminal (white) and the terminal (black) are not adjacent to each other, and the white terminal and the black terminal are separated in advance to prevent erroneous connection of signal lines.

Further, all the colors constituting the external terminal seal 88 may be used for the color of the terminal. For example, yellow and black are used for the external terminal seal 88. Then, these colors are included in the terminals (yellow, black) in the external information terminal unit 900. As a result, the portion where the external information terminal portion 900 is provided on the back surface of the game board 110 is conspicuous, and the administrator can make it difficult to forget the work of attaching the signal line.

Subsequently, the variation effect in the second embodiment will be described.
Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the fluctuation time is set to 30 seconds to 90 seconds. That is, when the jackpot is won, the fluctuation time is set to be long. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the production time of the fluctuation production pattern. Further, the longer the effect time of the variable effect pattern is, the more special reach effects such as SP reach and SPSP reach are executed. Therefore, the longer the production time, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. Further, in the second embodiment, the order of the non-reach effect, the normal reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SP / SP reach effect is from the one with the lowest expectation of the jackpot to the one with the highest expectation.

[Preliminary determination effect of the second embodiment]
Next, a production example of the pre-determination effect of the second embodiment will be specifically described.
In the second embodiment, the effect control unit 300 sets a display mode of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 (hereinafter, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are collectively referred to as an “object image”) as one of the preliminary determination effects. It is possible to perform "object change effect" to change and "special light emission effect" to mainly emit light from the light emitting unit 24 of the first starting port unit 20.
In the following description, the hold that is the target for notifying the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment effect is referred to as a notification target.
Then, in the second embodiment, the object change effect and the special light emission effect can be executed independently of each other. However, as will be described later, the object change effect and the special light emission effect may be executed together for the same notification target.

(Object change production)
The object change effect is executed when a predetermined condition such as the presence / absence of a jackpot of the notification target of the preliminary determination result, the type of the jackpot symbol, and the fluctuation time is satisfied. Then, in the object change effect, the color, pattern, shape, etc. of the object image (hereinafter referred to as display color) are changed with respect to the default (standard) display mode. In the second embodiment, the display color of the default object image is white. Then, in the second embodiment, the display color of the object image is changed to suggest the possibility (that is, the degree of expectation) that the jackpot game is performed to the player.

The object change effect changes the object image to a predetermined display color from a plurality of display colors according to the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. Here, in the second embodiment, when the object image is displayed in white, it is in the default (standard) state in which the object change effect is not performed. Then, in the object change effect, the object image is changed to one of the display colors of blinking white, blue, green, and red. These display colors are ranked. In the present embodiment, the order is blinking white → blue → green → red from the lowest to the highest. As for these display colors, the longer the effect time is, the higher the ratio of selecting the color having the higher rank is high, and the shorter the effect time is, the higher the ratio of selecting the color having the lower rank is.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the longer the production time is, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the order of expectation of big hit is from low to high, in the order of white → white blinking → blue → green → red.
Note that the display colors are not changed in order according to the above order, but the display colors in the middle may be omitted. Further, in the present embodiment, the display color having a high degree of expectation does not change to the display color having a low degree of expectation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the object change effect of the order of blue or higher (that is, blue, green, red) is executed, the reach effect (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach) is at least in the change effect of the notification target. I'm trying to run it.

(Special light emission production)
The special light emission effect is executed when a predetermined condition such as the presence / absence of a jackpot of the notification target of the preliminary determination result, the type of the jackpot symbol, and the fluctuation time is satisfied. Then, the special light emitting effect is mainly performed by making the light emitting unit 24 of the first starting port unit 20 a special light emitting mode.
Here, it is sufficient that the player can recognize that the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 24 is different from that when the special light emitting effect is not executed (hereinafter, when the special light emitting effect is not executed). For example, it can be exemplified that the light emitting unit 24 at the time of non-execution is turned off and the light emitting unit 24 at the time of special light emitting effect is made to emit light. Further, it can be exemplified that the light emitting unit 24 at the time of non-execution has a small amount of light and the light emitting unit 24 at the time of special light emitting effect has a large amount of light. Furthermore, it can be exemplified that the light emitting unit 24 at the time of non-execution has a slow blinking speed (light emitting interval is long), and the light emitting unit 24 at the time of special light emitting effect has a fast blinking speed (light emitting interval is short).

Further, in the special light emitting effect, the light emitting unit 24 may have a constant blinking speed from the start to the end of the effect. On the other hand, in the special light emitting effect, the period during which the light emitting unit 24 emits light in the first blinking pattern, which is the first blinking speed, is different from the first blinking speed between the start of the effect and the end of the effect. It has a second blinking speed (including a case where it is faster or slower than the first blinking speed) and has a period during which light is emitted in the second blinking pattern performed after the first blinking pattern. You may go.

In addition, the special light emission effect can emit light in any of white light emission, blue light emission, green light emission, and red light emission. Then, these emission colors are ranked in the same manner as the above-mentioned object change effect. In the present embodiment, the order of white emission → blue emission → green emission → red emission is from the one with the lowest expectation of the jackpot to the one with the highest expectation.

Subsequently, the variation effect of the second embodiment will be specifically described.
(Variable production example 6)
79-1, 79-2, 79-3, and 79-4 are explanatory views of variation effect example 6 in the pattern variation effect of the decorative symbol performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit.

As shown in FIG. 79-1 (1), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped on the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends. In this example, the combination of the numbers of the decorative symbol 61 that has been fixedly stopped is "246". In addition, the combination of the numbers of the small symbols 56 that have been confirmed and stopped is also "246". Further, the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55. The hold number display 55 remains “0”. Further, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed respectively.
Further, the light emitting unit 24 of the first starting port unit 20 is turned off.

Then, the change of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 starts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (2), the decorative symbol 61 starts the symbol variation with the action at the start of the variation. In this example, the action at the start of fluctuation is that the decorative symbol 61, which has stopped fluctuating, moves once in the direction opposite to the scroll direction, and then scrolls in the scroll direction. Further, the variable image 51 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The variable image 51 is displayed in white, which is the default. The small symbol 56 fluctuates in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. The number of pending display 55 is "0". Further, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (3), the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (4), the number "3" which is the left decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped. Then, in the variation effect example 6, the game ball newly wins a prize at the first starting port 121. At this time, since the special symbol is changing, the right to judge the jackpot for a new prize is reserved. Then, the reserved image 52 is displayed. Further, in the hold number display 55, the hold number increases from "0" to "1".

Then, in this variation effect example 6, the right that has been won and held at this time is the notification target in the pre-determination effect. Then, in this example, the execution of the special light emission effect and the object change effect is started at the timing of winning the first start port 121. Then, in the variation effect example 6, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-light emitting state to the white light emitting state as a special light emitting mode after a lapse of a predetermined time from the winning timing of the first starting port 121. To do.
When the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-light emitting state to the white light emitting state, the first reserved image 52 is in the process of shifting from the non-displayed state to the white blinking display. At this timing, the player is difficult or unrecognizable that the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blinking white.
Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined sound effect (for example, "pilone") is emitted from the speaker 156 at the timing when the light emitting unit 24 emits light in a special light emitting mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (5), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of winning the first starting port 121, the first reserved image 52 is changed from the undisplayed state to the white blinking display. Become. Then, in the variation effect example 6, the light emitting unit 24 does not emit light due to the special light emission effect during the time required to complete the transition from the undisplayed state of the first reserved image 52 to the white blinking state due to the object change effect. It is longer than the time required to complete the transition from the state to the state of emitting white light.

Here, the VDP 314 (see FIG. 4) of the present embodiment displays the effect images constituting various effects using the frame images of 60 frames per second. Then, in the special light emission effect, the time for one frame (= about 1.66 milliseconds) is taken to complete the transition of the light emitting unit 24 from the non-light emitting state to the white light emitting state. On the other hand, in the object change effect, the transition of the first reserved image 52 from the undisplayed state to the white blinking state is completed by using the frame image of 30 frames. That is, in the object change effect, it takes 30 frames (= 0.5 seconds) to complete the transition of the first reserved image 52 from the undisplayed state to the white blinking state.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the timing at which the player recognizes that the light emitting unit 24 is emitting white light is different from the timing at which the player recognizes that the first reserved image 52 is blinking white. ing. Then, in the second embodiment, the player can recognize the white light emission of the light emitting unit 24 before the white blinking of the first reserved image 52.

Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (5), the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "312" of the decorative symbol 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.
Further, the small symbol 56 stops as the special symbol stops fluctuating. At this time, the small symbol 56 stops at the same "312" as the number combination of the decorative symbol 61. Further, the variable image 51 is erased.
Even if the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit white light as a special light emitting effect. Further, the reserved image 52 continues to blink white as an object change effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (6), the decorative symbol 61 starts the symbol variation with the start of the next variation of the special symbol. Further, in the image display unit 114, the reserved image 52 is displayed and changed as the variable image 51. At this time, the variable image 51 continues to blink white, which is the mode before the display is changed. Then, the small symbol 56 also starts to fluctuate. The number of pending display 55 is reduced from "1" to "0".
Further, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit white light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (7), the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates. At this time, the variable image 51 blinking white is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking due to white light emission.
At this time, the game ball wins the first starting port 121, and the reserved image 52 is newly displayed. Then, the number of pending display 55 increases from "0" to "1".

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (8), the number "5", which is the left decorative symbol 61, temporarily stops. Then, in the variation effect example 6, the temporary stop timing is set as the transition reference timing (hereinafter referred to as the transition reference timing), and the second emission color change and display color change in the special light emission effect and the object change effect start execution. Will be done. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from white light emission to blue light emission after a predetermined time has elapsed from the second transition reference timing.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from white light emission to blue light emission, the variable image 51 is in the process of transition from white blinking to blue light emission. At this timing, the player is difficult or unable to recognize that the variable image 51 turns blue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (9), the transition from white blinking to blue is completed in the variable image 51 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the second transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 has already emitted blue light. That is, in the present embodiment, the transition from white emission to blue emission is completed in the light emitting unit 24 before the transition from white blinking to blue is completed in the variable image 51.

In the variation effect example 6, in the special light emission effect, it takes a time (= about 1.66 milliseconds) for one frame to complete the transition from the white light emission to the blue light emission state of the light emitting unit 24. On the other hand, in the object change effect, the transition of the variable image 51 from white blinking to blue is completed by using the frame image of 60 frames. That is, in the object change effect, the change image 51 is completely changed from blinking white to blue by taking a time (= 1 second) for 60 frames.
In the present embodiment, the number of frames (for example, 60 frames) used to complete the color change of the already displayed object image (variable image 51, reserved image 52) is the object image from the undisplayed state. It is larger than the number of frames used to complete the color change (eg, 30 frames).
Then, in the variation effect example 6, the light emitting unit 24 emits blue light before the variation image 51 is completely changed to blue, so that the player can instantly change the color of the variation image 51 to blue. I'm informing you.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting unit 115L also emit blue light at the timing when the light emitting unit 24 shifts from white light emission to blue light emission. However, the blue emission of the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting unit 115L is temporary, and at least after the variable image 51 changes to blue, it emits light in another emission color such as extinguishing or white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (10), the number "5" which is the left decorative symbol 61 and the number "5" which is the right decorative symbol 61 are temporarily stopped, and the two decorative symbols 61 are aligned. Normal reach is established by temporarily stopping in this state. At this time, the variable image 51 is blue, and the light emitting unit 24 is emitting blue light.
Further, in this example, two new reserved images 52 are displayed as the game ball wins the first starting port 121 twice. That is, the first, second, and third reserved images 52 are displayed. Then, the number of pending display 55 is increased from "1" to "3".

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (11), the third change in emission color and the change in display color in the special light emission effect and the object change effect start to be executed with the predetermined timing in the normal reach state as the transition reference timing. Will be done. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from blue light emission to green light emission after a predetermined time has elapsed from the third transition reference timing.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from blue emission to green emission, the variable image 51 is in the middle of transition from blue to green. At this timing, the player is difficult or unable to recognize that the variable image 51 turns green.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (12), the transition from blue to green is completed in the variable image 51 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the third transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is already blinking due to green light emission. That is, in the variation effect example 6, the transition from the blue emission to the green emission is completed in the light emitting unit 24 before the variation image 51 changes from blue to green.

In the variation effect example 6, in the special light emission effect, it takes a time (= about 1.66 milliseconds) for one frame to complete the transition from the blue light emission to the green light emission state of the light emitting unit 24. On the other hand, in the object change effect, the transition of the variable image 51 from blue to green is completed by using the frame image of 60 frames. That is, in the object change effect, it takes 60 frames (= 1 second) to complete the transition of the variable image 51 from blue to green.
Then, in the variation effect example 6, the light emitting unit 24 emits green light before the variation image 51 is completely changed to green, so that the player can instantly change the color of the variation image 51 to green. I'm informing you.

In the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting unit 115L also emit green light at the timing when the light emitting unit 24 shifts from blue light emission to green light emission. However, the green light emission of the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting unit 115L is temporary, and at least after the variable image 51 changes to green, it emits light in another light emitting color such as extinguishing or white.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (13), the decorative symbol 61 is reduced and displayed on the image display unit 114, and the process shifts to SP reach. At this time, the variable image 51 is green, and the light emitting unit 24 is emitting green light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (14), the fourth change in emission color and the change in display color in the special light emission effect and the object change effect are set with a predetermined timing after the transition of SP reach as the transition reference timing. Execution is started. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission after a predetermined time has elapsed from the fourth transition reference timing.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission, the variable image 51 is in the process of transition from green to red. At this timing, the player is difficult or unable to recognize that the variable image 51 turns red.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (15), the variation image 51 completes the transition from green to red after a predetermined time has elapsed from the fourth transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 has already emitted red light. That is, in the variation effect example 6, the transition from the green emission to the red emission is completed in the light emitting unit 24 before the variation image 51 changes from green to red.

In the variation effect example 6, in the special light emission effect, a time (= about 1.66 milliseconds) for one frame is taken to complete the transition of the light emitting unit 24 from green light emission to red light emission. On the other hand, in the object change effect, the transition of the variable image 51 from green to red is completed by using the frame image of 60 frames. That is, in the object change effect, it takes 60 frames (= 1 second) to complete the transition of the variable image 51 from green to red.
Then, in the variation effect example 6, the light emitting unit 24 is made to emit red light before the variation image 51 is completely changed from green to red, so that the player is given a color that the variation image 51 changes thereafter. I'm informing you instantly.

In the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting unit 115L also emit red light at the timing when the light emitting unit 24 shifts from green light emission to red light emission. However, the red emission of the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting unit 115L is temporary, and at least after the variable image 51 changes to red, it emits light in another emission color such as extinguishing or white.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (16), the image display unit 114 shifts to SPSP reach. At this time, the decorative symbol 61 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed on the image display unit 114. However, the hold number display 55 and the small symbol 56 are still displayed on the image display unit 114, respectively.
Further, after the transition to SPSP reach, the variable image 51 is red, and the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking due to red light emission.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (17), the image display unit 114 displays a lever operation image 538 that urges the player to operate the effect lever 161L. Then, in the variation effect example 6, the variation image 51 is hidden while the lever operation image 538 is displayed. However, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light even when the red variable image 51 is hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (18), when the player operates the effect lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is displayed, the movable accessory 115 located on the upper side of the game board 110 Descends to the center of the game board 110. In the variation effect example 6, the movable accessory 115 is located at the center of the image display unit 114 at an appearance position overlapping the image display unit 114. Then, the movable accessory 115 causes the accessory light emitting unit 115L to emit light. At this time, the light emitting mode of the accessory light emitting unit 115L is different from the state in which the accessory light emitting unit 115L is located at the standby position, the amount of light is large, the speed of light emission and blinking is fast, and the number of light emitting colors is large. Further, the image display unit 114 displays an effect image 115e that emphasizes the presence of the movable accessory 115.
In this variation effect example 6, the variation image 51 is hidden while the movable accessory 115 faces the central portion of the image display unit 114 and the effect image 115e is displayed on the image display unit 114. To. However, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light even when the red variable image 51 is hidden.
As described above, it is assumed that the player is worried that the degree of expectation has decreased due to the fact that the variable image 51, which has a high degree of expectation of red, is hidden. However, in the variation effect example 6, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit light by the emission color corresponding to the display color of the variation image 51, so that the player can enjoy the effect without worrying about it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79-4 (19), when the movable accessory 115 returns to the standby position, the doublet decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped on the image display unit 114. In this example, the three decorative symbols 61, which are the numbers "5", are temporarily stopped.
When the temporary stop of the doublet decorative symbol 61 is displayed, the red variable image 51 is displayed again. The light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-4 (20), the decorative symbol 61 having the same number “5” and having high decorativeness is displayed on the image display unit 114, and these three decorative symbols 61 are fixedly stopped. To do. In the illustrated example, by displaying the decorative symbol 61 in the combination of "555", the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. The small symbol 56, like the decorative symbol 61, also stops at the number "555".
Here, the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped, and after the fixed time is completed, the light emitting unit 24 stops the red light emission. That is, the light emitting unit 24 ends the light emission as the special light emission effect when the symbol change of the right to be notified is stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-4 (21), the opening image 589 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The opening image 589 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. More specifically, the characters "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" are displayed on the opening image 589 of the present embodiment. A right-handed image 542 is displayed on the image display unit 114. After that, a jackpot game is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, a special light emitting effect using the light emitting unit 24 that expects a big hit by emitting light in a special light emitting mode is executed. A decorative sticker 23, which is the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100, is provided in the vicinity of the light emitting unit 24. Therefore, the player can easily pay attention to the light emitting unit 24.
Further, in the special light emission effect, when the light emitting unit 24 emits light, for example, a sound effect is output from the speaker 156. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the light emitting unit 24 when the light emitting unit 24 emits light.
On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, for example, by providing a light warning sticker 75 on the surface of the game board 110, a warning is given so that the player does not stare at the light emitting unit 24 more than necessary. This prevents the player from feeling dazzling.

FIG. 80 is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in the variation effect example 6.
As shown in FIG. 80, from the timing of winning the notification target until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition to white light emission in the special light emission effect and the object image shifts to white blinking in the object change effect. There is a time lag.
Further, from the second transition reference timing, until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from white light emission to blue light emission in the special light emission effect, and until the object image changes from white blinking to blue in the object change effect. There is a time lag.
Furthermore, from the third transition reference timing, until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from blue light emission to green light emission in the special light emission effect, and until the object image shifts from blue to green in the object change effect. There is a time lag.
Then, from the fourth transition reference timing, there is a time difference between the time when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission in the special light emission effect and the time when the object image shifts from green to red in the object change effect. Is occurring.

Then, for example, the white light emitting period during which white light is emitted in the special light emitting effect is larger than the white blinking period (after the transition to white blinking is completed and before the transition to blue is completed) which is white blinking in the object change effect. It's getting shorter. As described above, when focusing on the change to a specific color, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right of the notification target is shorter than the execution time of the object change effect for the right of the notification target.

(Variable production example 7)
81-1, 81-2, 81-3, and 81-4 are explanatory views of a decorative pattern variation effect example 7 performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit.

As shown in FIG. 81-1 (1), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped on the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends. In this example, the combination of the numbers of the decorative symbol 61 that has been fixedly stopped is "765". In addition, the combination of the numbers of the small symbols 56 that have been confirmed and stopped is also "765". Further, the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55 and the small symbol 56. The hold number display 55 is “0”. Further, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed respectively. Further, the light emitting unit 24 of the first starting port unit 20 is turned off.

Then, the change of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 starts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 81-1 (2), the decorative symbol 61 starts the symbol variation with the action at the start of the variation. Further, the variable image 51 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The variable image 51 is displayed in white, which is the default. The small symbol 56 fluctuates in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. The number of pending display 55 is "0". Further, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81-1 (3), the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off. Further, in the variation effect example 7, a game ball is newly won in the first starting port 121. Then, the reserved image 52 is newly displayed. Further, in the hold number display 55, the hold number increases from "0" to "1".

After that, as shown in FIG. 81-1 (4), the number "8" which is the left decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 81-1 (5), the number "3", which is the right decorative symbol 61, temporarily stops. Further, in the variation effect example 7, the game ball further wins a prize at the first starting port 121. Then, in the variable effect example 7, the right that has been won and held at this time is the notification target in the pre-determination effect. In the variation effect example 7, the execution of the special light emission effect and the object change effect is started at the timing of winning the first starting port 121. Then, in the variation effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-light emitting state to the green light emitting state as a special light emitting mode after a lapse of a predetermined time from the winning timing of the first starting port 121. To do.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-light emitting state to the green light emitting state, the second reserved image 52 is in the middle of the transition from the non-displayed state to the green display. At this timing, the player is difficult or unrecognizable that the second reserved image 52 turns green.
In addition, in the variation effect example 7, a predetermined sound effect is emitted from the speaker 156 at the timing when the light emitting unit 24 emits light in a special light emitting mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-1 (6), the transition from the undisplayed state to the green display of the second reserved image 52 is completed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the winning timing of the first starting port 121. To do. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 has already emitted green light. That is, in the variation effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 starts emitting green light before the second green reserved image 52 is displayed.
In addition, in the variation effect example 7, the relationship between the time required for the transition of the emission color in the special light emission effect and the time required for the transition of the display in the object change effect is the same as in the variation effect example 6. Then, in the variation effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 is made to emit green light before the second green reserved image 52 is displayed, so that the player can see the second reserved image 52 after that. The color of image 52 is notified instantly.
In the hold number display 55, the hold number increases from "1" to "2".

Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (7), the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "813" of the decorative symbol 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.
Further, the small symbol 56 stops as the special symbol stops fluctuating. At this time, the small symbol 56 stops at the same "813" as the number combination of the decorative symbol 61. Further, the variable image 51 is erased.
Even if the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit green light as a special light emitting effect. Further, the reserved image 52 continues to be displayed in green as an object change effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (8), the decorative symbol 61 starts the symbol variation with the start of the next variation of the special symbol. Further, in the image display unit 114, the display of the first reserved image 52 is changed as the variable image 51. Further, the position of the second reserved image 52 moves as the first reserved image 52. At this time, the first reserved image 52 continues to display the green color, which is the mode before being moved. Then, the small symbol 56 also starts to fluctuate. The number of pending display 55 is reduced from "2" to "1". Further, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit green light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (9), the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates.
Then, in the variation effect example 7, the game ball wins twice in the first starting port 121, and the second and third reserved images 52 are newly displayed in order. Then, the number of pending display 55 is increased from "1" to "3".
Further, a green reserved image 52 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Then, with the predetermined timing as the transition reference timing, the second change in the emission color and the change in the display color in the special light emission effect and the object change effect are started. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission after a predetermined time has elapsed from the second transition reference timing.
When the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission, the first reserved image 52 is in the process of transition from green to red. At this timing, the player has difficulty or is unable to recognize that the variable image 51 turns red.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (10), the transition of the first reserved image 52 from green to red is completed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the third transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 has already emitted red light.
In addition, in the variation effect example 7, the relationship between the time required for the transition of the emission color in the special emission effect and the time required for the transition of the display color in the object change effect is the same as in the variation effect example 6. That is, in the variation effect example 7, the transition from the green light emission to the red light emission is completed by the light emitting unit 24 before the reserved image 52 changes from green to red. In the variation effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 emits red light before the reserved image 52 turns red, so that the player is notified of the color of the reserved image 52 that changes thereafter in an instant.

In the variation effect example 7, the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting unit 115L also emit red light at the timing when the light emitting unit 24 shifts from green light emission to red light emission. However, the red light emission of the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting unit 115L is temporary, and at least after the reserved image 52 changes color to red, it emits light in another light emitting color such as extinguishing or white.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (10), the number "2" which is the left decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "5" which is the right decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped.

Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (11), the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "275" of the decorative symbol 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.
Further, the small symbol 56 stops as the special symbol stops fluctuating. At this time, the small symbol 56 stops at "275", which is the same as the number combination of the decorative symbol 61. Further, the variable image 51 is erased.
Even if the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking by red light emission as a special light emission effect. Further, the first reserved image 52 continues to be displayed in red as an object change effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (12), the decorative symbol 61 starts the symbol variation with the start of the next variation of the special symbol. Further, in the image display unit 114, the display of the first reserved image 52 is changed as the variable image 51. At this time, the variable image 51 continues to display the red color, which is the mode before the display is changed. Further, the positions of the second and third reserved images 52 move as the first and second reserved images 52, respectively. Then, the small symbol 56 also starts to fluctuate. The number of pending display 55 is reduced from "3" to "2". Further, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (13), the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates.
Then, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (14), the number "2" which is the left decorative symbol 61 and the number "2" which is the right decorative symbol 61 are temporarily stopped, and the two decorative symbols 61 are aligned. Normal reach is established by temporarily stopping in this state. At this time, the variable image 51 is red, and the light emitting unit 24 is emitting red light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (15), the decorative symbol 61 is reduced and displayed on the image display unit 114, and the process shifts to SP reach. At this time, the variable image 51 is red, and the light emitting unit 24 is emitting red light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (16), the image display unit 114 shifts to SPSP reach. At this time, the decorative symbol 61 and the reserved image 52 are hidden on the image display unit 114. However, the hold number display 55 and the small symbol 56 are displayed on the image display unit 114, respectively.
Further, in the variation effect example 7, when the SPSP reach is shifted, the red variation image 51 is also hidden. On the other hand, the light emitting unit 24 continuously emits red light.
In the variation effect example 7, it is assumed that the player is worried that the expectation is lowered by hiding the variation image 51 having a high expectation of red. However, in the variation effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit light in the emission color corresponding to the display color of the variation image 51, so that the player can enjoy the effect without worrying about it. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (17), the doublet decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped on the image display unit 114. In this example, the three decorative symbols 61, which are the numbers "2", are temporarily stopped.
When the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 61 of the Zoro eyes is displayed, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (18), the decorative symbol 61 having the same number “2” and high decorativeness is temporarily stopped on the image display unit 114.
Then, in the variation effect example 7, the variation image 51 and the hold image 52 are displayed at the timing when the three decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped. At this time, the variable image 51 is displayed in red, which is the mode before it is hidden.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81-4 (19), in the variation effect example 7, the promotion effect is executed. In the promotion effect, the player is expected to see whether or not the doublet decorative symbol 61 of the temporarily stopped number "2" becomes the doublet decorative symbol 61 of another number. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81-4 (20), the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in the combination of "555", so that the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. .. That is, the decorative symbol 61 is an example of being promoted to a decorative symbol that is a jackpot that is more profitable for the player than the doublet decorative symbol before the promotion effect. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 remain hidden.
The small symbol 56, like the decorative symbol 61, also stops at the number "555".
Here, the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped, and after the fixed time is completed, the light emitting unit 24 stops blinking due to red light emission. That is, the light emitting unit 24 ends the light emission as the special light emission effect when the symbol change of the right to be notified is stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-4 (21), the opening image 589 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The opening image 589 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. More specifically, the characters "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" are displayed on the opening image 589 of the present embodiment. A right-handed image 542 is displayed on the image display unit 114. After that, a jackpot game is executed.

Then, in the variation effect example 7, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right of the notification target and the execution time of the object change effect for the right of the notification target are different.
In the variation effect example 7, the execution time of the object change effect for the right to be notified is, for example, the color of the red variation image 51 after the display of the green reserved image 52 is started with the winning of the right to be notified. It is the time until it changes and disappears with the transition of SPSP reach. On the other hand, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right to be notified is, for example, the symbol of the right to be notified, for example, the light emitting unit 24 starts emitting green light when the right to be notified is awarded, and then shifts to red light emission. This is the time until the light emitting unit 24 goes out when the fluctuation is fixedly stopped. Therefore, in the variation effect example 7, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right of the notification target is longer than the execution time of the object change effect for the right of the notification target.

FIG. 82 is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in the variation effect example 7.
As shown in FIG. 82, there is a time lag between the timing of winning the notification target and the time when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition to green light emission in the special light emission effect and the time when the object image shifts to green in the object change effect. Is occurring.
In addition, from the second transition reference timing, there is a time lag between the time when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission in the special light emission effect and the time when the object image completes the transition from green to red in the object change effect. Is occurring.

Then, in the variable effect example 7, the total effect time from the start to the end of the special light emission effect is temporarily from the start to the end of the object change effect and at the time of temporary stop of the Zorome. It is longer than the total time that the object image is displayed. As described above, as a whole, the execution time of the special light emitting effect for the right of the notification target is longer than the execution time of the object change effect for the right of the notification target.

Further, for example, the green light emitting period during which the green light is emitted in the special light emitting effect is shorter than the green period (after the completion of the transition to green and before the completion of the transition to red) which is green in the object change effect. There is. As described above, when focusing on the change to a specific color, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right of the notification target is shorter than the execution time of the object change effect for the right of the notification target.

(Variable production example 8)
83-1, 83-2, and 83-3 are explanatory views of an example 8 of a variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit.
Note that the variation effect example 8 is an example in which the hold image 52 is displayed but the variation image 51 is not displayed. For example, when the change of the special symbol for the reserved right is started, the reserved image 52 corresponding to the reserved right is deleted (that is, reserved digestion).

As shown in FIG. 83-1 (1), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped on the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends. In this example, the combination of the numbers of the decorative symbol 61 that has been fixedly stopped is "135". In addition, the combination of the numbers of the small symbols 56 that have been confirmed and stopped is also "135". Then, in the variation effect example 8, two reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, the image display unit 114 displays a hold number display 55 indicating a number "2" indicating that there are two holds.
Further, the light emitting unit 24 of the first starting port unit 20 is turned off.

Then, the change of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 starts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 83-1 (2), the decorative symbol 61 starts the symbol variation with the action at the start of the variation. In the image display unit 114, the first reserved image before the start of fluctuation is erased, and the second reserved image 52 before the start of fluctuation is moved to the position of the first reserved image 52. The reserved image 52 is displayed in white, which is the default. Then, the small symbol 56 fluctuates in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 is set to "1". Further, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83-1 (3), the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates.
Further, in the variation effect example 8, the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 121. Then, in the variable effect example 8, the right reserved based on the winning at this time is the notification target in the pre-determination effect. Then, in this example, the execution of the special light emission effect and the object change effect is started at the timing of winning the first start port 121. Then, in the variation effect example 8, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-light emitting state to the white light emitting state as a special light emitting mode after a lapse of a predetermined time from the winning timing of the first starting port 121. To do.
When the light emitting unit 24 has completed the transition from the non-light emitting state to the white light emitting state, the second reserved image 52 is in the process of shifting from the non-displayed state to the white blinking display. At this timing, the player is difficult or unable to recognize that the second reserved image 52 is displayed in blinking white. The number of pending display 55 changes from "1" to "2".
Further, in the variation effect example 8, a predetermined sound effect is emitted from the speaker 156 at the timing when the light emitting unit 24 emits light in a special light emitting mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83-1 (4), the transition of the second reserved image 52 from the undisplayed state to the white blinking display is completed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the winning timing of the first starting port 121. To do. In addition, in the variation effect example 8, the relationship between the time required for the transition of the emission color in the special emission effect and the time required for the transition of the display in the object change effect is the same as in the variation effect example 6.

Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 83-1 (4), the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "684" of the decorative symbol 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, the small symbol 56 stops as the special symbol stops fluctuating. At this time, the small symbol 56 stops at "684", which is the same as the number combination of the decorative symbol 61.
Even if the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking by white light emission as a special light emitting effect. Further, the second reserved image 52 continues to blink white as an object change effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83-1 (5), the decorative symbol 61 starts the symbol variation with the start of the next variation of the special symbol. Further, in the image display unit 114, the first reserved image 52 is erased. Further, the second reserved image 52 before the start of fluctuation moves to the position of the first reserved image 52. At this time, the first reserved image 52 continues to blink white, which is the aspect of the second reserved image 52 before the start of fluctuation.
Further, in the variation effect example 8, the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 121 at this timing. Therefore, the second reserved image 52 is newly displayed. It should be noted that the hold number display 55 apparently remains "2" due to the hold digestion and the hold occurrence. Further, the light emitting unit 24 continues to blink white.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83-1 (6), the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates.
At this timing, in the variation effect example 8, the game ball further wins a prize at the first starting port 121. Then, the third reserved image 52 is newly displayed. The number of pending display 55 is changed from "2" to "3".

After that, the fluctuation of the special symbol that had been fluctuating stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (7), the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "312" of the decorative symbol 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, the small symbol 56 stops as the special symbol stops fluctuating. At this time, the small symbol 56 stops at the same "312" as the number combination of the decorative symbol 61.
Even if the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit white light as a special light emitting effect. Further, the first reserved image 52 continues to blink white as an object change effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 832 (8), the decorative symbol 61 starts the symbol variation with the start of the next variation of the special symbol. Further, in the image display unit 114, the first reserved image 52 is erased. That is, the first reserved image 52 that was blinking white before the start of fluctuation is deleted. That is, the change of the right to be notified by the pre-determination effect is started. Further, the object change effect ends when the reserved image 52 to be notified is deleted. Further, the second reserved image 52 before the start of fluctuation moves to the position of the first reserved image 52. The number of pending display 55 is changed from "3" to "2".
Then, in the variation effect example 8, the light emitting unit 24 continuously blinks white. As described above, in the variation effect example 8, even after the reserved image 52 that has been blinking white, which is the notification target, is erased, the light emitting unit 24 continues to notify the expected degree of winning the jackpot. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (10), the number "6", which is the decorative symbol 61 on the left, temporarily stops. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking by white light emission as a special light emission effect.
Then, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (11), the number "6" which is the right decorative symbol 61 is temporarily stopped, and the normal reach is established by temporarily stopping with the two decorative symbols 61 aligned. .. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking by white light emission as a special light emission effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (12), the process shifts to SP reach. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 stops blinking due to white light emission. That is, the light emitting unit 24 ends the light emission as the special light emission effect. As described above, in the variation effect example 8, the special light emission effect ends before the symbol variation regarding the right to be notified is stopped.
Further, in the variation effect example 8, the reserved image 52 is hidden at the timing of shifting to the SP reach.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83-3 (13), a fanning effect of whether or not the intermediate decorative symbol 61 is aligned with the left decorative symbol 61 and the right decorative symbol 61 is executed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 83-3 (14), the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "676" of the decorative symbol 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.
Further, in the variation effect example 8, the reserved image 52 is displayed again at the timing when the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped. It should be noted that this variation effect example 8 is a case of finally being off, but even in the case of a big hit, the hidden image 52 is displayed again at the timing when the decorative symbol 61 is fixedly stopped.

FIG. 84 is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in the variation effect example 8.
As shown in FIG. 84, in the variation effect example 8, from the timing of winning the notification target until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition to white light emission in the special light emission effect, and the object image shifts to white blinking in the object change effect. There is a time lag between the time and the time.

Then, in the variation effect example 8, the total effect time from the start to the end of the special light emission effect is longer than the total effect time from the start to the end of the object change effect. As described above, as a whole, the execution time of the special light emitting effect for the right of the notification target is longer than the execution time of the object change effect for the right of the notification target.

[Customer waiting production]
Next, an example of a customer waiting effect in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram of the customer waiting effect of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 85, the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is stopped and displayed, and the customer waiting effect is started based on the customer waiting effect command set in S3207 of FIG. 22.
In the customer waiting effect of the present embodiment, the demo image 92, the alert image 93, and the model name image 94 are reproduced in order.

The demo image 92 is an image related to the game of the pachinko gaming machine 100, such as an explanation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and a demonstration of a predetermined production with a high expectation of a big hit.

Further, the alert image 93 is an image that alerts the player with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 100. The attention alert image 93 displays, for example, the contents described on a sticker that is visible to the player with the glass door frame 150G closed and indicates information to the player (see FIG. 57). In the present embodiment, the attention alert image 93 displays the contents described in the contact alert alert sticker 71, the operation alert alert sticker 72, the light alert alert sticker 75, and the fraud prevention alert sticker 76.

Further, the model name image 94 is an image showing "CR Pachinko Star 777-Dream Dome Tour-", which is a part of the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100, as described above.
Then, in the customer waiting effect, the screen transitions of FIGS. 85A to 85 are repeated until the customer waiting flag is turned off.

FIG. 86 is a reception screen for setting the content of the player's effect in the pattern variation effect of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The reception screen is displayed according to the menu screen 571 (see FIG. 49).
In this example, in the symbol variation effect, the first setting item 951 that accepts the setting of the effect using the upper accessory 5, the second setting item 952 that accepts the setting of the effect using the effect lever 161L, the light emitting unit 24, etc. It has a third setting item 953 that accepts the setting of the effect using various lamps.

The first setting item 951 is an item that accepts the setting of the frequency at which the upper accessory 5 is in the protruding state in the symbol variation effect. The effect control unit 300 adjusts the selection probability of the variation effect pattern in which the upper accessory 5 is used among the plurality of variation effect patterns according to the setting received from the player in the first setting item 951. That is, when the player wants the upper accessory 5 to appear frequently, the effect control unit 300 facilitates selection of the variable effect pattern in which the upper accessory 5 is used. On the other hand, when the player does not want the upper accessory 5 to appear, the effect control unit 300 makes it difficult to select the variable effect pattern in which the upper accessory 5 is used.

The second setting item 952 is an item that accepts the setting of the frequency of instructing the player to operate the effect lever 161L in the symbol variation effect. The effect control unit 300 adjusts the selection probability of the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used among the plurality of variable effect patterns according to the setting received from the player in the second setting item 952.

The third setting item 953 is an item that accepts the setting of the frequency of the effect using various lamps in the symbol variation effect. The effect control unit 300 adjusts the selection probability of the variation effect pattern in which various light emitting lamps are used among the plurality of variation effect patterns according to the setting received from the player in the third setting item 953.

In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, various effects are performed by using the upper accessory 5, the effect lever 161L, various light emitting lamps, and the like so that the player can enjoy the game. On the other hand, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 100 calls attention to the players regarding the components related to the production, such as the contact warning sticker 71, the operation warning sticker 72, and the light warning sticker 75. .. In this way, in order to alert the player, it is preferable to be able to adjust the operation related to the alert of the component that is the target of the alert. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the operation of the component unit to be alerted can be set.

Although various effects of the pachinko gaming machine 100 have been described above, it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the described contents to other effects, controls, etc., even if there is no particular mention. In addition, although various embodiments and modifications have been mentioned, it is possible to apply or combine the contents of the embodiments and modifications to other effects, etc., even if this document is not mentioned. .. In addition, it is possible to combine various embodiments and modifications, or to replace some of them, even if not mentioned in this document. For example, various seals in the first embodiment, constituent parts related to the seals, and various effects can be applied to the second embodiment. On the contrary, various seals in the second embodiment, constituent parts related to the seals, and various effects can be applied to the first embodiment.

24 ... Light emitting part, 71 ... Contact warning sticker, 72 ... Operation warning sticker, 73 ... Spec sticker, 75 ... Light warning sticker, 77 ... Board number sticker, 80 ... Board warning sticker, 86 ... Main ROM sticker

Claims (1)

A transparent member provided on the front side of the game board on which the game area is formed, and
An acquisition means for acquiring game information according to the winning of a game ball at a predetermined start port provided on the game board, and
Based on the acquired game information, a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, and
A light emitting means for producing a light emitting effect that makes it expected that the special game will be performed, and
A decorative means provided in the vicinity of the light emitting means and decorating according to the motif of the game machine,
Attention-calling means for calling attention to staring at the light-emitting effect by the light-emitting means, and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the first distance, which is the distance between the transparent member and the caution means, and the second distance, which is the distance between the transparent member and the light emitting means, are different.